Manual Do Usuario Pioneer DVR-520H Ingles

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 128

DVR-04_HDD_UK.

book 1 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

DVD Recorder

DVR-420H
DVR-520H
DVR-720H

Operating Instructions

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 2 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

IMPORTANT
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, CAUTION: The exclamation point within an equilateral
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC triangle is intended to alert the user to the
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR presence of important operating and
"dangerous voltage" within the product's BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
enclosure that may be of sufficient INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED literature accompanying the appliance.
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric SERVICE PERSONNEL.
shock to persons.
D3-4-2-1-1_En-A

WARNING: The apparatus is not waterproofs, to WARNING:


prevent fire or shocks hazard, do not expose this BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE FIRST
apparatus to rain or moisture and do not put any TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SECTION CAREFULLY.
water source near this apparatus, such as vase, The voltage of the available power supply differs
flower pot, cosmetics container and medicine according to country or region. Be sure that the
bottle etc. D3-4-2-1-3_En power supply voltage of the area where this unit
will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230V
or 120V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_En

CAUTION
This product contains a laser diode of higher class

CLASS 1
than 1. To ensure continued safety, do not remove any
covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the
product.
Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. LASER PRODUCT
The following caution label appears on your unit.

D3-4-2-1-8_En

This product complies with the Low Voltage Directive


(73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC), EMC Directives
(89/336/EEC, amended by 92/31/EEC and
93/68/EEC). D3-4-2-1-9a_En

The STANDBY/ON switch is secondary connected


and therefore, does not separate the unit from mains
power in STANDBY position. Therefore install the
unit suitable places easy to disconnect the MAINS
plug in case of the accident. The MAINS plug of unit
should be unplugged from the wall socket when left
unused for a long period of time. D3-4-2-2-2a_En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 3 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

WARNING: No naked flame sources, such as This product incorporates copyright protection technology
lighted candle, should be placed on the apparatus. that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents
If naked flame sources accidentally fall down, fire and other intellectual property rights owned by
spread over the apparatus then may cause fire. Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of
D3-4-2-1-7a_En this copyright protection technology must be authorized
by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
Operating Environment engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 ºC – +35 ºC (+41 ºF – +95 ºF); less than 85 %RH
(cooling vents not blocked)
Do not install in the following locations
• Location exposed to direct sunlight or strong artificial This product is for general household purposes. Any failure
light due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-
• Location exposed to high humidity, or poorly term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a
car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for
ventilated location D3-4-2-1-7c_En
even during the warranty period. K041_En

VENTILATION: When installing this unit, make


sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation This product includes FontAvenue® fonts licenced by NEC
to improve heat radiation (at least 10 cm at top, 10 corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC
cm at rear, and 10 cm at each side). Corporation.
WARNING: Slots and openings in the cabinet are
provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable
operation of the product and to protect it from
overheating, to prevent fire hazard, the openings
should never be blocked and covered with items, POWER-CORD CAUTION
such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains, etc. Also Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the
do not put the apparatus on the thick carpet, bed, plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power
sofa, or fabric having a thick pile. D3-4-2-1-7b_En cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a
short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a
piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the
cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other
cords. The power cords should be routed such that they
are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord
can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check
the power cord once in a while. When you find it
damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized
service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002_En

Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel.
The cut-off plug should be disposed of and must Do not connect either wire to the earth terminal of a
IMPORTANT not be inserted into any 13 amp socket as this can
result in electric shock. The plug or adaptor or the
three pin plug.

distribution panel should be provided with 5 A fuse. NOTE


FOR USE IN THE UNITED As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this After replacing or changing a fuse, the fuse cover in
KINGDOM appliance may not correspond with coloured the plug must be replaced with a fuse cover which
The wires in this mains lead are coloured in markings identifying the terminals in your plug, corresponds to the colour of the insert in the base
accordance with the following code: proceed as follows ; of the plug or the word that is embossed on the
Blue : Neutral The wire which is coloured blue must be connected base of the plug, and the appliance must not be
Brown : Live to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or used without a fuse cover. If lost replacement fuse
If the plug provided is unsuitable for your socket coloured black. covers can be obtained from your dealer.
outlets, the plug must be cut off and a suitable plug The wire which is coloured brown must be Only 5 A fuses approved by B.S.I or A.S.T.A to
fitted. connected to the terminal which is marked with the B.S.1362 should be used.
letter L or coloured red. D3-4-2-1-2-2_En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 4 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Contents
01 Before you start Switching DVD soundtracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Switching audio channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
What’s in the box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Putting the batteries in the remote control . . . . . . . . . 8
Using the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Disc / content format playback compatibility . . . . . . . 9 06 Recording
About the internal hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 About DVD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
About HDD recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Recording time and picture quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
02 Connecting up Restrictions on video recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Rear panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Setting the picture quality/recording time . . . . . . . . 47
Front panel connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Basic recording from the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Extra features for use with compatible TVs . . . . . . . . 13 Setting a timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Easy connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Timer recording FAQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Using other types of audio/video output . . . . . . . . . . 15 Simultaneous recording and playback . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver . . . . . 16 Recording from an external component . . . . . . . . . . 56
Connecting an external decoder box (1) . . . . . . . . . . 17 Automatic recording from a satellite tuner . . . . . . . . 56
Connecting an external decoder box (2) . . . . . . . . . . 18 Recording from a DV camcorder
Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver . . . . . . . . . . 19 (DVR-520H/720H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Connecting other AV sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Recording from the DV output
Plugging in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 (DVR-520H/720H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Playing your recordings on other DVD players . . . . . 59
Initializing a DVD-RW disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
03 Controls and displays
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 07 Copying and back-up
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
One Touch Copy (HDD to DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
One Touch Copy (DVD to HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
04 Getting started Copying from HDD to DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 HDD to DVD Copy List menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Selecting the hard disk or DVD for playback and Recording the Copy List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 HDD to DVD Copy List commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Making your first recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Copying from DVD to HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Using the built-in TV tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 DVD to HDD Copy List menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Basic playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Recording the Copy List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Using the Home Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 DVD to HDD Copy List commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Displaying disc information on-screen . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Using disc back-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

05 Playback 08 Editing
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 The Disc Navigator screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents Disc Navigator menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
of a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Editing VR mode Original, Video mode and HDD
Navigating discs and the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Editing HDD groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Creating and editing a VR mode Play List . . . . . . . . . 84
Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
The Play Mode menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Displaying and switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 5 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

09 Disc History 15 Index


Using the Disc History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

10 The PhotoViewer
Playing a slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

11 The Disc Setup menu


Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
HDD Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Finalize settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

12 The Video/Audio Adjust menu


Setting the picture quality for TV and external
inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Setting the picture quality for disc playback . . . . . . 95
Audio DRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

13 The Initial Setup menu


Using the Initial Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Tuner settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Video In / Out settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Audio In settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Audio Out settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Recording settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Playback settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

14 Additional information
Resetting the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . 112
Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
About DV (DVR-520H/720H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Manual recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Language code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Country code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
On-screen displays and recorder displays . . . . . . . 120
Handling discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Storing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Damaged discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Hints on installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Moving the recorder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

5
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 6 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

01 Before you start

Chapter 1
Before you start
• Disc Navigator
Features The on-screen Disc Navigator makes finding your way
around the contents of a disc or the HDD easy. For
recordable DVD and HDD content, moving thumbnail
• HDD recording HDD
images are displayed for ease of use. The Disc Navigator
You can record up to 102 hours of video (in EP mode) on
is also where you can edit HDD and recordable DVD
the internal 80GB (gigabyte) hard disk (HDD) on the DVR-
content.
420H/520H, or up to 204 hours on the 160GB DVR-720H.
With both recordable DVD and a high-capacity HDD in • Disc History
the same recorder, you have the flexibility to keep The Disc History screen shows disc information,
recordings on the HDD for quick access anytime, or including how much free space remains for recording,
record to DVD for archiving or playing on other DVD for the last 30 recordable discs loaded in the recorder.
players. Every time you load a recordable disc, the Disc History is
automatically updated with the latest information.
• Copy between HDD and DVD
You can copy recordings from the HDD to recordable • Home Menu
DVD, or from DVD to the HDD. Usually you can use the The Home Menu gives you on-screen access to all the
high-speed copy feature, which can copy an hour of video recorder’s features in one convenient place, from setting
in under two minutes (when recorded in EP mode using up the recorder, to programming a timer recording and
a DVD-R Ver. 2.0 / 8x disc). editing a recording.
You can also choose to copy material at a different • Cinema surround sound in your home
recording quality from the original. For example, you Connect this recorder to a Dolby Digital and/or DTS-
might want to copy a FINE mode (highest quality) compatible AV amp/receiver to enjoy full surround sound
recording on the HDD to SP (standard play) quality on a effects from Dolby Digital and DTS DVD discs.
DVD so that you can fit other recordings on the same
disc. • Easy Timer Recording
Setting the recorder to record a program is simple from
• One Touch Copy the Easy Timer Recording screen. Set the channel to
One Touch Copy makes copying the currently playing title record and the recording quality, then graphically set the
from HDD to DVD, or DVD to HDD as simple as pressing start and end times of the recording. That’s it!
a button.
• Program up to 32 timer recordings
• Chase play VR mode HDD You can program the recorder to record up to 32
Using chase play you can start watching a recording programs, up to a month in advance, using the
before the recording has finished. For example, you could VIDEO Plus+® system* for easy programming if you
set a timer recording for a program that you’re going to want. As well as single programs, you can specify daily or
miss the first 15 minutes of, then start watching while the weekly recordings, too.
recorder is still recording the program 15 minutes ahead This recorder is also compatible with VPS/PDC systems,
of you. which ensure you don’t miss a timer recording, even if
the broadcast is not running to schedule.
• Simultaneous recording and playback
*1
VR mode HDD is a registered trademark of Gemstar
®

Playback and recording for both DVDs and the built-in Development Corporation.
hard disk drive (HDD) are completely independent. For The VIDEO Plus+ system is manufactured under
example you can record a broadcast program to either a license from Gemstar Development Corporation.
recordable DVD or the HDD, while watching another
recording you already made on the same DVD or on the • One Touch Recording
HDD. Use One Touch Recording to start recording immediately
in 30 minute blocks. Each time you press the  REC
button, the recording time is extended by another 30
minutes.

6
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 7 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Before you start 01

• Optimized recording • Play Video mode recordings on a regular DVD


Optimized recording adjusts the recording quality
player Video mode
automatically if a timer recording will not fit onto a disc
Discs recorded using the Video mode can be played back
with the settings that you made.
on regular DVD players, including computer DVD drives
• Auto Start Recording from satellite receiver or compatible with DVD-Video playback*.
other set top box *
With a satellite receiver or other set top box connected to ‘DVD-Video format’ recording: The use of the DVD-
the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) inputs Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs
of this recorder, you can start and stop recording is referred to as recording in ‘Video mode’ on Pioneer’s
automatically according to the timer settings of the set DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD-
top box. RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD
playback equipment, and there is DVD playback
• High quality 16-bit Linear PCM audio equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs
When recording using one of the high quality record recorded in the DVD-Video format.
settings (FINE or MN32), the audio is recorded in Note: ‘Finalization’ is required.
uncompressed 16-bit Linear PCM format. This delivers
great sounding audio to accompany the high picture • WMA, MP3 and JPEG file playback
quality. This recorder can play WMA and MP3 audio files and
JPEG picture files on CD-R, CD-RW or CD-ROM discs.
• Picture quality adjustment features
During playback, you can adjust various picture quality • Disc Back-up
settings to improve the picture. You can also adjust the The disc back-up feature gives you a convenient way to
recording picture quality. For example, if you want to back-up important material on DVD to another
make a DVD copy of an old video tape, you can optimize recordable DVD disc. The material is first copied to the
the picture quality before transferring it to disc. HDD, then on to a second DVD disc.

• Find what you want to watch quickly and easily • Recovery Recording HDD
Unlike video tape that needs to be wound to the correct When a timer recording is set to use DVD but the disc
place, you can jump right to the part of a DVD disc or the loaded at the time of the recording is unrecordable, the
HDD that you want to watch. Search for a point on a disc program will automatically be recorded to the HDD.
by title, chapter or time.
• Auto Replace Recording HDD
• Manual recording
This feature is useful for regular timer recordings of a TV
In addition to the four preset recording quality modes
program which you don’t want to keep after watching.
(FINE, SP, LP and EP), the manual recording mode allows
Each time the program is recorded, it replaces the one
you to access 32 different recording quality/time settings,
currently on the HDD. There’s no need to manually delete
giving you precise control over the recording.
it later.
• Record to and from a DV camcorder (DVR-520H/
720H only)
This recorder has a built-in DV (Digital Video) input/ Note on copying:
output jack for connection to a DV camcorder. This Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you
are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in
makes it ideal for transferring camcorder footage to DVD which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as
or HDD for editing. You can also transfer DVD or HDD films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or
content back to the camcorder if you need to. consented to by the rightowners.

• Safe, non-destructive editing VR mode


When you edit a DVD-RW, the actual content of the disc
(the Original content) is not touched. The edited version
(the Play List content) just points to various parts of the
Original content.

• Chapter marking VR mode HDD


You can easily add chapter markers anywhere in your
recordings for easy editing.

7
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 8 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

01 Before you start

Note
What’s in the box
Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as
Please confirm that the following accessories are in the
leakage and bursting. Please observe the following:
box when you open it.
• Don’t mix new and old batteries together.
• Remote control
• Don’t use different kinds of batteries together—
• AA/R6P dry cell batteries x2
although they may look similar, different batteries
• Audio/video cable (red/white/yellow) may have different voltages.
• RF antenna cable • Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each
• Power cable battery match the indications in the battery
• These operating instructions compartment.
• Warranty card • Remove batteries from equipment that isn’t going to
be used for a month or more.
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply
with governmental regulations or environmental
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or
Putting the batteries in the remote area.
control
1 Open the battery compartment cover on the
back of the remote control.
Using the remote control
Please keep in mind the following when using the remote
control:
• Make sure that there are no obstacles between the
remote and the remote sensor on the unit.
• Remote operation may become unreliable if strong
2 Insert two AA/R6P batteries into the battery sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit’s
compartment following the indications ( ,) inside remote sensor.
the compartment. • Remote controllers for different devices can interfere
with each other. Avoid using remotes for other
equipment located close to this unit.
• Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the
operating range of the remote.
• When the batteries run down or you change the
batteries, the remote control mode and TV preset
3 Close the cover. codes are automatically reset. See Remote Control
Set on page 99 and Setting up the remote to control
your TV on page 112 to reset them.
• Use within the operating range and angle, as shown.

30
30
7m

• You can control this recorder using the remote


sensor of another Pioneer component using the
CONTROL IN jack on the rear panel. See Rear panel
connections on page 12 for more information.

8
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 9 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Before you start 01

Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD


Disc / content format playback writers may reject DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 / 4x discs. If you want
to share DVD-RW discs between this recorder and an
compatibility older recorder/writer, we recommend using Ver. 1.1
discs.
General disc compatibility The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorder
This recorder is compatible with a wide range of disc compatibility with DVD-RW Ver. 1.2 / 4x discs.
types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally Model Playable Recordable
feature one of the following logos on the disc and/or disc
packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as DVR-7000 Yes 1,2,3 No
recordable CD and DVD, may be in an unplayable
DVR-3100/ DVR-5100H Yes1 No
format—see below for further compatibility information.
1
Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized
VR mode and Video mode discs may not play.
2
DVD-Video DVD-R DVD-RW Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when
you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback.
3
Copy-once protected disc titles will not play.

CD-R/RW compatibility
Audio CD Video CD CD-R CD-RW
This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs.
• Compatible formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/Super
VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA or
JPEG files
Fujicolor CD * ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format:
Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file
• Also compatible with KODAK Picture CD systems are both compatible with this recorder.
• is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing • Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-Audio and
Corporation. Video CD/Super VCD)
• Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio only
• is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd.
This recorder also supports the IEC’s Super VCD
standard. Compared to the Video CD standard, Super Compressed audio compatibility
VCD offers superior picture quality, and allows two • Compatible media: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW
soundtracks to be recorded. Super VCD also supports the • Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3),
widescreen size. Windows Media Audio (WMA)
• Sampling rates: 44.1 or 48kHz
VIDEO • Bit-rates: Any (128Kbps or higher recommended)
CD • Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes
Super Video CD (Super VCD)
• VBR WMA playback: No
• WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec
DVD-R/RW compatibility 8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be
This recorder will play and record DVD-R/RW discs. playable but some parts of the specification are not
supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR)
Compatible media:
• DRM (Digital Rights Management) file playback: No
• DVD-RW Ver. 1.1, Ver. 1.1 / 2x and Ver. 1.2 / 4x
(see also DRM in the Glossary on page 122)
• DVD-R Ver. 2.0 and Ver. 2.0 / 4x / 8x
• File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for
Recording formats: the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files – do
• DVD-R: DVD-Video format (Video mode) not use for other file types)
• DVD-RW: Video Recording (VR) format and DVD- • File structure: Up to 99 folders / 999 files (if these
Video format (Video mode) limits are exceeded, only files and folders up to these
limits are playable)

9
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 10 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

01 Before you start

WMA (Windows Media Audio) compatibility


Frequently asked questions
• What’s the difference between DVD-R and DVD-RW?
The most important difference between DVD-R and
DVD-RW is that DVD-R is a record-once medium,
while DVD-RW is a re-recordable/erasable medium.
You can re-record/erase a DVD-RW disc
approximately 1,000 times.
The Windows Media® logo printed on the box indicates For more information, see About DVD recording on
that this recorder can playback Windows Media Audio page 45.
content.
• What’s VR mode?
WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers
to an audio compression technology developed by VR (Video Recording) mode is a special mode
Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by designed for home DVD recording. It allows flexible
editing of recorded material compared to ‘Video
using Windows Media® Player version 7, 7.1, Windows
mode’. On the other hand, Video mode discs are
Media® Player for Windows® XP, or Windows Media® more compatible with other DVD players.
Player 9 Series.
• Can I play my recordable discs in a regular DVD player?
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are
Generally, DVD-R discs and DVD-RW discs recorded
trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. in Video mode* are playable in a regular DVD player,
but they must be ‘finalized’ first. This process fixes
the contents of the disc to make them readable to
JPEG file compatibility other DVD players as DVD-Video discs.
• Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2* DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode are playable in
still image files some players.
*File format used by digital still cameras
• Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:4:2, 4:2:0 This label indicates playback compatibility with
DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode (Video
• Horizontal resolution: 160 – 5120 pixels
Recording format). However, for discs recorded with
• Vertical resolution: 120 – 3840 pixels a record-only-once encrypted program, playback can
• Progressive JPEG compatible: No only be achieved using the CPRM compatible device.
• File extensions: .jpg, jpeg, jif, jfif (must be used for the Note that Pioneer cannot guarantee that discs
recorder to recognize JPEG files – do not use for other recorded using this recorder will play on other players.
file types) *
‘DVD-Video format’ recording: The use of the DVD-
• File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders Video format for recording on DVD-R and DVD-RW discs
/ 999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders is referred to as recording in ‘Video mode’ on Pioneer’s
that this on the disc then more can be reloaded) DVD recorders. Supporting playback of DVD-R / DVD-
RW discs is optional for manufacturers of DVD
PC-created disc compatibility playback equipment, and there is DVD playback
Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be equipment that does not play DVD-R or DVD-RW discs
playable in this unit due to the setting of the application recorded in the DVD-Video format.
software used to create the disc. In these particular Note: ‘Finalization’ is required.
instances, check with the software publisher for more This recorder supports the recording of ‘copy-once’
detailed information. broadcast programs using the CPRM copy protection
Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are system (see CPRM on page 46) on CPRM-compliant
not compatible with this recorder. DVD-RW discs in VR mode. CPRM recordings can only
Check the DVD-R/RW or CD-R/RW software disc boxes be played on players that are specifically compatible
for additional compatibility information. with CPRM.

10
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 11 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Before you start 01

• Do I need two DVD recorders for editing? What kind of


editing can I do? About the internal hard disk drive
Unlike editing video tape, you only need one DVD The internal hard disk drive (HDD) is a fragile piece of
recorder to edit discs. With DVD, you edit by making equipment. Please use the recorder following the
a ‘Play List’ of what to play and when to play it. On guidelines below to protect against possible HDD failure.
playback, the recorder plays the disc according to the
We recommend that you back up your important
Play List.
recordings onto DVD-R/RW discs in order to protect against
Original accidental loss.
Title 1 Title 2 Title 3
• Do not move the recorder while it is on.
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 1 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 • Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface.
• Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.
• Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid
places, or in places that may be subject to sudden
changes in temperature. Sudden changes in
temperature can cause condensation to form inside
the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure.
Title 1 Title 2 • While the recorder is switched on, do not unplug
from the wall socket or switch the electricity off from
Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 the breaker switch.
Play List • Do not move the recorder immediately after
switching it off. If you need to move the recorder,
Throughout this manual, you will often see the words
please follow the steps below:
Original and Play List to refer to the actual content
and the edited version. 1 After the message POWER OFF is shown in the
display, wait at least two minutes.
• Original content refers to what’s actually recorded
on the disc. 2 Unplug from the wall socket.
• Play List content refers to the edited version of the 3 Move the recorder.
disc—how the Original content is to be played. • If there’s a power failure while the recorder is on
there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be
lost.
• The HDD is very delicate. If used improperly or in an
unsuitable environment, it is possible that the HDD
will fail after a few years of use. Signs of problems
include playback unexpectedly freezing and
noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture.
However, sometimes there will be no warning signs
of HDD failure.
If the HDD fails, no playback of recorded material will
be possible. In this case it will be necessary to
replace the HDD unit.

11
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 12 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

02 Connecting up

Chapter 2

Connecting up

Rear panel connections

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

ANTENNA

OUT IN AC IN
R L

AUDIO VIDEO IN OPTICAL


S-VIDEO AV 1 (RGB) - TV AV 2/AUTO START REC
OUTPUT (INPUT 1/DECODER) CONTROL DIGITAL OUT

1 ANTENNA IN/OUT 6 DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL


Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA IN jack. The For connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver, Dolby Digital/
signal is passed through to the ANTENNA OUT jack for DTS/MPEG decoder or other equipment with optical
connection to your TV. digital input.
2 OUTPUT jacks 7 AC IN – Power inlet
Stereo analog audio, video and S-video outputs for
connection to a TV or AV amplifier/receiver.
3 AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector
Audio/video output SCART-type AV connector for Front panel connections
connecting to a TV or other equipment with a SCART
connector. The video output is switchable between video, STANDBY/ON

PULL-OPEN
HDD DVD


OPEN/CLOSE REC ONE TOUCH COPY


DV IN/OUT

S-video and RGB. See page AV1 Out on page 102 for how
DV IN/OUT

S-VIDEO VIDEO

to set this up.


On the left side of the front panel a flip-down cover hides
4 AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV a second audio/video input, consisting of an S-video and
connector standard (composite) video jack, and stereo analog
Audio/video input/output SCART-type AV connector for audio jacks.
connecting to a VCR, or other equipment with a SCART
connector. The input accepts video, S-video and RGB. DV-520H/720H only: On the right side is the DV input/
See AV2/L1 In on page 102 for how to set this up. output i.LINK connector. This is for connection to a DV
camcorder.
5 CONTROL IN
Use to control this recorder from the remote sensor of
another Pioneer component with a CONTROL OUT
terminal and bearing the Pioneer  mark. Connect the
CONTROL OUT of the other component to the
CONTROL IN of this recorder using a mini-plug cord.

12
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 13 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Connecting up 02

EPG download
Extra features for use with EPG download allows you to program a timer recording
directly from the electronic program guide displayed on
compatible TVs your TV.
When this recorder is connected to a TV that features T-V
See the manual that came with your TV for more
Link, EasyLink, MegaLogic, SMARTLINK, Q-Link, DATA
information on how to use this feature. Note that the SP
LOGIC or NexTView Link using a fully-wired 21-pin SCART
and LP options displayed on your TV correspond to the SP
cable (not supplied), the following functions are
and LP recording modes on this recorder.
available:
• Direct TV recording
• Channel preset download
TV auto power on
When you play a disc in this recorder, the TV
• Electronic Program Guide (EPG) download automatically turns on and switches to the correct video
• TV auto power on input. See the manual that came with your TV for how to
• System configuration use this feature.

Direct TV recording System configuration


Direct TV recording allows you to record the TV program Basic settings, including language, country and TV
that you’re watching, without having to worry about screen size (aspect ratio), can be downloaded from your
whether this recorder is set to the same channel. See TV to help set up this recorder for use.
Direct recording from TV on page 48 for more on this
feature. Note
• For further details and compatibility information, see
Channel preset download also the manual that came with your TV.
This feature allows you to set up the channel presets of
this recorder very simply using the channel presets and
preset names already in your TV. See Switching on and
setting up on page 25 and Auto Channel Setting :
Download from TV on page 100 for more on this feature.

13
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 14 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

02 Connecting up

Easy connections
The setup described below is a basic setup that allows you to watch and record TV programs, and play discs. Other
types of connections are explained starting on the following page.

Important
• These connections use SCART cables (not supplied). If your TV (or VCR) does not have a SCART connection, see
the following page for connecting up using the supplied audio/video cable.
• The AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector can output ordinary (composite), S-video or RGB video, plus stereo analog audio.
The AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) connector accepts ordinary, S-video and RGB video input, as
well as stereo analog audio. See AV1 Out on page 102 and AV2/L1 In on page 102 for how to set them up.
• Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and
unplugged from the wall outlet.
1 Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR.
ANTENNA • If you are not connecting a VCR in the chain, connect
IN it to the ANTENNA IN jack on this recorder and skip
the next step.
SCART AV 2 Use an RF antenna cable (one is supplied) to
CONNECTOR
connect the antenna output of your VCR to the
ANTENNA IN of this recorder.
3 4 TV
3 Use another RF antenna cable to connect the
ANTENNA OUT of this recorder to the antenna input
on your TV.
ANTENNA

OUT IN AC IN
R

AUDIO
L

VIDEO IN OPTICAL
4 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
S-VIDEO AV 1 (RGB) - TV AV 2/AUTO START REC

AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector on this recorder to the


OUTPUT (INPUT 1/DECODER) CONTROL DIGITAL OUT

SCART AV connector on your TV.


5 5 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2/
2 AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector
to a SCART AV connector on your VCR.
SCART AV
ANTENNA CONNECTOR
OUT
Note
• See the following page if you want to use one of the
VCR other kinds of audio/video connection.
ANTENNA
IN

1 Tip
Antenna/cable TV • This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows
wall outlet
you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner
in this recorder while watching a video playing on
your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in
standby, Power Save must be set to Off—see Power
Save on page 98).

14
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 15 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Connecting up 02

Using other types of audio/video output


If you can’t use the SCART AV connector to connect your TV to this recorder, there are standard audio/video output
jacks, as well as an S-video output.

Using the supplied audio/video cable Using the S-video output

AUDIO
INPUT

AUDIO S-VIDEO
INPUT INPUT
VIDEO
INPUT
2 1
TV TV

2 1

ANTENNA
ANTENNA
OUT IN AC IN
R L OUT IN AC IN
R L

AUDIO VIDEO IN OPTICAL


S-VIDEO AV 1 (RGB) - TV AV 2/AUTO START REC
OUTPUT (INPUT 1/DECODER) CONTROL DIGITAL OUT AUDIO VIDEO IN OPTICAL
S-VIDEO AV 1 (RGB) - TV AV 2/AUTO START REC
OUTPUT (INPUT 1/DECODER) CONTROL DIGITAL OUT

1 Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT jack to a video input 1 Use an S-video cable (not supplied) to connect
on your TV. the S-VIDEO OUTPUT to an S-video input on your TV,
Use the yellow jack of the supplied audio/video cable for monitor (or other equipment).
the video connection.
2 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the
2 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the corresponding audio inputs on your TV.
corresponding audio inputs on your TV. You can use the supplied audio/video cable, leaving the
Use the red and white jacks of the supplied audio/video yellow video plug disconnected. Make sure you match up
cable for the audio connection. Make sure you match up the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs
the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound.
for correct stereo sound.

15
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 16 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

02 Connecting up

Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver


If you have a cable or satellite receiver with a built-in decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this
page. If you are using a separate decoder box for your cable/satellite TV, set up following the instructions on the next
page.
Using the setup on this page you can:
• Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box/satellite tuner.

Important
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component
directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver.
1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.
ANTENNA
IN 2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector
on your TV.
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
This enables you to watch discs.
3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2/
1 2 TV AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector
to a SCART AV connector on your satellite/cable
box.
ANTENNA
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.
OUT IN AC IN
R L

AUDIO VIDEO IN OPTICAL


S-VIDEO AV 1 (RGB) - TV AV 2/AUTO START REC
OUTPUT (INPUT 1/DECODER) CONTROL DIGITAL OUT

Note
• The diagram shows SCART video connections, but
3 you can alternatively use any of the other audio/video
1 connections.
SCART AV
ANTENNA CONNECTOR
OUT Tip
• This recorder has a ‘through’ function which allows
you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner
Cable/Satellite box
ANTENNA
in this recorder while watching a video playing on
IN your VCR. (To use this feature when the recorder is in
standby, Power Save must be set to Off—see Power
1
Save on page 98).
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet

16
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 17 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Connecting up 02

Connecting an external decoder box (1)


If you have an external, dedicated decoder box for your satellite or cable TV system, use the setup described on this
page.

Important
• Do not connect your decoder box directly to this recorder.
• Information from the decoder (for example, relating to pay TV services), is only viewable when this recorder is off
(in standby).
• For timer recording to work properly on this recorder, the VCR/satellite receiver/cable box must also be switched
on during recording.
• It is not possible to watch one TV program and record another using this setup.

SCART AV
CONNECTOR

4 TV

ANTENNA

OUT IN AC IN
R L

AUDIO VIDEO IN OPTICAL


S-VIDEO AV 1 (RGB) - TV AV 2/AUTO START REC
OUTPUT (INPUT 1/DECODER) CONTROL DIGITAL OUT

3
2

SCART AV SCART AV
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR

Decoder VCR/Satellite receiver ANTENNA


/Cable box
IN

1
Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet

1 Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV 3 Use a SCART cable to connect your VCR/satellite
outlet to the antenna input on your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box to the AV2/AUTO START REC
receiver/cable box. (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector on this recorder.
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect your 4 Use a SCART cable to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV
decoder to your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box. AV connector to your TV.
See the manual for your decoder box for more detailed
instructions.

17
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 18 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

02 Connecting up

Connecting an external decoder box (2)


If you only have a decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this page.
Using the setup on this page you can:
• Record scrambled channels received using the recorder’s built-in TV tuner.

Important
• Do not connect this recorder ‘through’ your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component
directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver.
1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown.
This enables you to watch and record TV channels.
ANTENNA
IN 2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the
AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector
on your TV.
This enables you to watch discs.
3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2/
1 2 SCART AV TV AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector
CONNECTOR to a SCART AV connector on your decoder box.
This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.
ANTENNA

OUT IN AC IN
R

AUDIO
L

VIDEO S-VIDEO AV 1 (RGB) - TV AV 2/AUTO START REC IN OPTICAL


Note
OUTPUT (INPUT 1/DECODER) CONTROL DIGITAL OUT

• In order to use this setup, you will need to make the


following settings from the Initial Setup menu:
3 – Set the AV2/L1 In setting to Decoder from the
Initial Setup menu (see AV2/L1 In on page 102).
1
– From the Manual CH Setting screen, set the
SCART AV
CONNECTOR
Decoder setting for the scrambled channels to On
(see Manual CH Setting on page 100).

Antenna/cable TV Decoder
wall outlet

18
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 19 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Connecting up 02

Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver
To enjoy multichannel surround sound you need to connect this recorder to an AV amplifier/receiver using the digital
optical output.
In addition to a digital connection, we recommend also connecting using the stereo analog connection for
compatibility with all discs and sources.
You’ll probably also want to connect a video output to your AV amplifier/receiver. Use the ordinary video output (as
shown here), or the S-video output.

Important
• Noise may be output from your speakers if the recorder is not set up to work with your AV amplifier/receiver
properly (see Audio Out settings on page 104).

ANTENNA VIDEO
IN IN

TV
4
1
A/V VIDEO
IN 1 OUT DIGITAL IN
OPTICAL

AV amp/ 2
3 receiver

ANTENNA

OUT IN AC IN
R L

AUDIO VIDEO IN OPTICAL


S-VIDEO AV 1 (RGB) - TV AV 2/AUTO START REC
OUTPUT (INPUT 1/DECODER) CONTROL DIGITAL OUT

Antenna/cable TV
wall outlet

1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown.


This enables you to watch and record TV channels. Note
• The diagram shows ordinary video connections,
2 Connect one of the DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL jack but you can alternatively use an AV connector or
on this recorder to an optical digital input on your S-video connections, if they’re available.
AV amplifier/receiver.
This enables you to listen to multichannel surround
sound. Important
3 Connect the analog AUDIO OUTPUT and VIDEO • Do not connect this recorder to your TV ‘through’
OUTPUT jacks on this recorder to an analog audio your VCR using A/V cables. Always connect it
and video input on your AV amplifier/receiver. directly to your TV.
4 Connect the AV amplifier/receiver’s video
output to a video input on your TV.

19
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 20 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

02 Connecting up

Connecting a DV camcorder
Connecting other AV sources (DVR-520H/720H only)
Using the front panel DV IN/OUT jack, it is possible to
connect a DV camcorder or video deck, or DVD-R/RW
Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder recorder and digitally transfer DV tapes or DVD-R/RW
discs to DVD-R/RW.
DV IN/OUT

AUDIO/VIDEO AUDIO/VIDEO Important


OUTPUT INPUT
• This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is
not compatible with digital satellite tuners or D-VHS
1 2 video decks.

DV IN/OUT

Analog camcorder DV
IN/OUT
AUDIO/VIDEO AUDIO/VIDEO DV
INPUT OUTPUT IN/OUT
VCR

1 Connect a set of audio and video outputs on DV camcorder


your VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this
recorder. 1 Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV
This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or in/out jack on your DV camcorder/deck to the front
camcorder. panel DV IN/OUT jack of this recorder.
• You can use ordinary video or S-video cables for the
video connection.
• The front panel connections make convenient
connections for a camcorder. Plugging in
Before plugging in for the first time, make sure that
2 Connect a set of audio and video inputs on your everything is connected properly.
VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this
recorder.
This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR
or camcorder.
• You can use ordinary video or S-video cables for the AC IN
video connection.
• Alternatively, you can use the AV2/AUTO START
REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART connector for
audio/video input and output with just one SCART
cable.

1 Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC IN


inlet and the other end into a standard household
power outlet.

20
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 21 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Controls and displays 03

Chapter 3
Controls and displays

Front panel
1 2 3 4 5 6

STANDBY/ON 
HDD DVD

PULL-OPEN OPEN/CLOSE REC ONE TOUCH COPY

DV IN/OUT

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7
Illustration shows DVR-520H

1  STANDBY/ON 9 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 62)


Press to switch the recorder on/into standby. Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing
title to DVD or the HDD.
2 HDD
Press to switch to the hard disk drive (HDD) for recording 10  REC
and playback. The button lights when HDD is selected. Press to start recording.
3 DVD 11
Press to switch to DVD for recording and playback. The Press to stop recording.
button lights when DVD is selected.
12 
4 IR remote sensor (page 8) Press to start or restart playback.
5 Disc tray 13 
Press to stop playback.
6 Front panel display
See Display on page 22 for details. 14  OPEN/CLOSE
Press to open/close the disc tray.
7 DV IN/OUT jack (DVR-520H/720H only) (page 12,
20, 56, 57, 59, 104, 117) 15 Front panel inputs (page 12)
Digital input/output jack for use with a DV camcorder. Pull the cover down where indicated to access the front
panel input jacks. Especially convenient for connecting
8 +/– (page 29, 31, 48)
camcorders and other portable equipment.
Use to change TV channels, skip chapters/tracks, etc.

21
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 22 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

03 Controls and displays

Display
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 12 13 14 15

1 / 10 Recording quality indicators (page 46)


Arrows indicate the copy direction between the HDD
FINE
( ) and DVD ( ). Lights when the recording mode is set to FINE (best
2  PLAY /  REC indicators quality).
Lights during playback / recording; blinks when playback SP
/ recording is paused. Lights when the recording mode is set to SP
(standard play).
3  (page 28)
The ‘ ’ and ‘’ indicators light to indicate that the HDD LP
or DVD is selected for recording/playback. Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long
play).
4 PL (page 78, 84)
Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the recorder is EP
in Play List mode. Lights when the recording mode is set to EP
(extended play).
5 2 3 (page 99)
Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is displayed, MN
the remote control mode is 1). Lights when the recording mode is set to MN
(manual recording level) mode.
6 REM
Lights when the character display is showing the 11 Character display
remaining available recording time.
12 (page 104)
7 V Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast
Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is loaded. are recorded.
8 R / RW 13 VPS / PDC (page 49)
Indicates the type of recordable DVD loaded: DVD-R or Lights when receiving a VPS/PDC broadcast during a
DVD-RW. VPS/PDC-enabled timer recording.

9 (page 49) 14 NTSC


Lights when a timer recording has been set. Lights when playing NTSC format video.
(Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but
15 OVER (page 104)
there isn’t a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has
Lights when the analog audio input level is too high.
been set to HDD but the HDD is not recordable.)
AUTO (page 56)
Lights when Auto Start Recording has been set, and
during Auto Start Recording.

22
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 23 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Controls and displays 03

7 DVD playback functions


Remote control AUDIO (page 29, 43, 44)
Changes the audio language or channel. (When the
recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner
1 2
STANDBY/ON ONE TOUCH OPEN/CLOSE
audio.)
COPY
3   4
SUBTITLE (page 43)
5 HDD DVD 6 Displays/changes the subtitles included in
7 AUDIO SUBTITLE ANGLE PLAY MODE multilingual DVD-Video discs.
8
ABC DEF
TV/DVD
9 ANGLE (page 44)
INPUT
GHI JKL MNO
SELECT Switches camera angles on discs with multi-angle
10 11
PQRS TUV WXYZ scenes.
VIDEO Plus+
+
CLEAR CHANNEL 12 8 PLAY MODE (page 40)
13 CLEAR
Press to display the Play Mode menu (for features such
DISC NAVIGATOR PLAY LIST

14 15 as search, repeat and program play).


TOP MENU MENU

9 TV/DVD (page 29)


16 ENTER
HOME
MENU RETURN
Press to switch between ‘TV mode’, in which you get the
picture and sound from the TV’s tuner, and ‘DVD mode’,
17 18
REV SCAN PLAY FWD SCAN in which you get picture and sound from the recorder’s
tuner (or an external input).
PAUSE STOP OK CM SKIP
19 10 Alphanumeric buttons and CLEAR
PREV CASE
SELECTION NEXT STEP/SLOW Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title selection;
REC STOP REC REC MODE TIMER REC channel selection, and so on. The same buttons can also
20  be used to enter names for titles, discs and so on.
DISC NAVI CHP EASY
HISTORY MARK MARK TIMER
21 Use CLEAR to clear an entry and start again.
TV CONTROL
DISPLAY

23

INPUT TV DIRECT
22 11 INPUT SELECT (page 56)
CHANNEL VOLUME
SELECT REC
24 Press to change the input to use for recording.
12 CHANNEL +/– (page 29)
Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner.
DVD RECORDER
13 VIDEO Plus+ (page 52)
Press, then use the number buttons to enter a
1 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 62) PlusCode® programming number for timer recording.
Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing
title to DVD or the HDD. 14 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 36, 76) / TOP MENU
(page 31)
2 Remote control indicator Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top
Lights when setting up the remote control for use with a menu if a DVD-Video disc is loaded.
TV (page 112) and when setting the remote control mode
(page 99). 15 PLAY LIST (page 78, 84) / MENU (page 31)
Press to switch between Original and Play List content on
3  STANDBY/ON VR mode discs, or display the disc menu if a DVD-Video
Press to switch the recorder on/into standby. disc is loaded.
4  OPEN/CLOSE 16 /// (cursor buttons) and ENTER
Press to open/close the disc tray. Used to navigate all on-screen displays. Press ENTER to
5 HDD (page 28) select the currently highlighted option.
Press to select the hard disk (HDD) for recording or 17 HOME MENU (page 33)
playback. Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can
6 DVD (page 28) navigate all the functions of the recorder.
Press to select the DVD for recording or playback. 18 RETURN
Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or
display.

23
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 24 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

03 Controls and displays

19 Playback controls (page 30) 21 DISC HISTORY (page 89)


Press to display summary information (disc name,
REV SCAN / FWD SCAN (page 38)
recording time left, etc.) from the last 30 recordable
Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press
discs loaded.
again to change the speed.
NAVI MARK (page 37)
 PLAY
Press to select a thumbnail picture for the current
Press to start playback.
title for use in the Disc Navigator screen.
 PAUSE
CHP MARK (page 81)
Press to pause playback or recording.
Press to insert a chapter marker when playing/
 STOP recording a VR mode DVD-RW disc or the HDD.
Press to stop playback.
22 DISPLAY (page 33)
CM BACK (commercial back) Displays/changes the on-screen information displays.
Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward
23 TV CONTROL (page 112)
through the audio or video playing.
After setting up, use these controls to control your TV.
CM SKIP (commercial skip)
24 TV DIRECT REC (page 48)
Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward
Press to start recording whatever channel your TV is set
through the audio or video playing.
to.
 PREV / NEXT 
Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/
track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu
page.
STEP/SLOW (page 39)
During playback, press to start slow-motion
playback; while paused, press to show the previous
or next video frame.
20 Recording controls (page 28)
 REC
Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the
recording time in blocks of 30 mins.
STOP REC
Press to stop recording.
REC MODE (page 47)
Press repeatedly to change the recording mode
(picture quality).
TIMER REC (page 51)
Press to set a timer recording from the standard
Timer Recording screen.
EASY TIMER (page 50)
Press to set a timer recording from the Easy Timer
Recording screen.

24
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 25 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Getting started 04

Chapter 4
Getting started
1 Switch on your TV and set the video input to this
Switching on and setting up recorder.
When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you 2 Press the  STANDBY/ON button on the remote
can make several basic settings using the Setup control or the front panel to switch on.
Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the When you switch on for the first time, your TV should
clock, the internal TV tuner and the video and audio display the Setup Navigator screen. (If the Setup
output settings. Navigator doesn’t appear, you can also access it from the
If you’re using the recorder for the first time, we strongly Initial Setup menu; see page 99).
recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting • If this recorder is connected to a compatible TV using
to use the recorder. a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable, the recorder will
take a few seconds to download country, TV screen
size and language information. (Check the manual
that came with your TV for compatibility information.)
STANDBY/ON

 3 Use the / (cursor up/down) buttons to choose


a language, then press ENTER.

Initial Setup

Basic Language
Clock Set
Tuner Input Line System
Video In/Out On Screen Display English
Audio In Front Panel Display français
Audio Out Power Save Deutsch
Language Remote Control Set Italiano
Recording Setup Navigator Español
Playback

4 Press ENTER to start setting up using the Setup


ENTER Navigator.

Initial Setup

Basic Clock Set


Complete this setup before you
Tuner Input Line System
start using your recorder.
Video In/Out On Screen Display
Audio In Front Panel Display Start
Audio Out Power Save
Language Remote Control Set Cancel
Recording Please use the Initial Setup if you
Setup Navigator
Playback want to make more detailed settings.

• If you don’t want to use the Setup Navigator, press 


(cursor down) to select Cancel, then press ENTER to
exit the Setup Navigator.
5 Select the Auto Channel Setting (‘Auto Scan’ or
‘Download from TV’), or ‘Do not set’, then press
DVD RECORDER ENTER.

Initial Setup

Basic Auto Channel Setting


Clock Set
Tuner Input Line System
Video In/Out On Screen Display
Audio In Front Panel Display Auto Scan
Audio Out Power Save Download from TV
Language Remote Control Set Do not set
Recording Setup Navigator
Playback

25
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 26 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

04 Getting started

• Select Do not set if you want to skip setting up the Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number
channels (because they have already been set up, for that broadcasts a time signal, then move the
example). cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER.
• You can only use the Download from TV feature if
you connected this recorder to your TV using a Initial Setup

fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable connected to the Basic Auto Clock Setting
Clock Set
Tuner Input Line System
AV1(RGB)-TV connector, and if your TV supports this Video In/Out
Date
On Screen Display
function (check your TV’s instruction manual for Audio In TimeDisplay
Front Panel
Audio Out Power Save
Clock Set CH Pr 1
more details). Language Remote Control Set
Start
Recording Setup Navigator
• Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to Playback

choose your country, then press ENTER.


The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After
Initial Setup
you see that the time has been set, select Next to
proceed.
Basic Country Selection
Clock Set
Tuner Input Line System
Video In/Out Country
On Screen Display UK
Audio In Front Panel Display Initial Setup
Audio Out Power Save
Language Remote Control Set Basic Auto Clock Setting
Clock Set
Recording Setup Navigator Tuner Input Line System
Date
Playback Video In/Out On Screen Display THU 01 01 2004
Audio In TimeDisplay
Front Panel 11 20
Audio Out Power Save
Clock Set CH Pr 1
Language Remote Control Set
• Auto-tuning channels Recording Setup Navigator
Start
Playback Next
The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the
channel presets.
If the time could not be set automatically, press
Tuning RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select
11/107 Manual.
Cancel
• Manual clock setting
If no stations in your area are broadcasting time
• Downloading channels from your TV signals, you can set the clock manually.
Use the Download from TV option to download all the
channels that your TV is tuned to. Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to set
your time zone.
Downloading Pr 5 You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative
to GMT.
Cancel

Initial Setup
6 Select ‘Auto’ for automatic time setting, or Basic Clock Set
Manual Clock Setting 1/2
‘Manual’ to set the clock manually, then press Tuner Input Line System
England
Video In/Out On Screen
TimeDisplay
Zone
ENTER. Audio In Front Panel Display
London
Audio Out Power Save
Summer Time Off
Language Remote Control Set
Recording Setup Navigator
Initial Setup
Playback
Basic Clock Setting
Clock Set
Tuner Input Line System
Video In/Out On Screen Display Press  (cursor down) then use the / (cursor
Audio In Front Panel Display Auto
Audio Out Power Save Manual left/right) buttons to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ for
Language Remote Control Set
Recording Setup Navigator
summer time, then press ENTER.
Playback Select On if you are currently using summer time.

• Auto clock setting Initial Setup


Some TV channels broadcast time signals together Basic Manual Clock Setting
Clock Set 1/2
with the program. This recorder can use these Tuner Input Line System
England
Video In/Out On Screen
TimeDisplay
Zone
signals to set the clock automatically. Audio In Front Panel Display
London
Audio Out Power Save
On
Language RemoteSummer
ControlTime
Set
Recording Setup Navigator
Playback

26
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 27 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Getting started 04

Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then Use the / (cursor up/down) buttons to select Dolby
press ENTER to make all the settings. Digital, Dolby Digital, DTS or PCM only, then press
ENTER.
Initial Setup • Check the operating instructions that came with your
Basic Manual Clock Setting
Clock Set 2/2 AV amplifier/receiver if you’re not sure what it’s
Tuner Input Line System
Video In/Out Date
On Screen Display
THU 01 01 2004 compatible with.
Audio In Front Panel
Time Display 00 00
Audio Out Power Save
Time Zone England 9 Is your AV amplifier/receiver compatible with 96
Language Remote Control Set
Recording Setup Navigator
London kHz PCM digital audio?
Playback Summer Time On

Initial Setup
Use the / (cursor up/down) buttons to change
Basic 96kHz PCM Compatible
Clock Set
the value in the highlighted field. Tuner Input Line System
Video In/Out On Screen Display
Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to move Audio In Front Panel Display Compatible
Audio Out Power Save Not Compatible
from one field to another. Language Remote Control Set Don't Know
Recording Setup Navigator
• You can go back to the previous screen at anytime in Playback
the Setup Navigator by pressing RETURN.
7 Select the TV screen type, ‘Standard (4:3)’ or Use the / (cursor up/down) buttons to select
‘Wide (16:9)’. Compatible, Not Compatible, or Don’t Know, then
press ENTER.
Initial Setup • Check the operating instructions that came with your
Basic TV Screen Size
Clock Set
AV amplifier/receiver if you’re not sure.
Tuner Input Line System
Video In/Out On Screen Display 10 Press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator, or select
Audio In Front Panel Display Wide (16:9)
Audio Out Power Save Standard (4:3) ‘Go Back’ if you want to start again.
Language Remote Control SetSetup Navigator
Recording Setup Navigator
Playback Initial Setup

Basic Clock Set


Use the / (cursor up/down) buttons to select, then Tuner
Video In/Out
Input LineSetup
Systemis complete!
On Screen Display
Enjoy using your DVD recorder!
press ENTER. Audio In Front Panel Display
Audio Out Power Save Finish Setup
Language Remote Control Set Go Back
8 Is this recorder connected to an AV amplifier/ Recording Setup Navigator
receiver for digital audio? Playback

Initial Setup That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator.
Basic AV Amp Digital Connect
Clock Set
Tuner Input Line System
Video In/Out On Screen Display Other settings you can make
Audio In Front Panel Display Connected
Audio Out Power Save Not Connected After setting up using the Setup Navigator, you should be
Language Remote Control Set
Recording Setup Navigator
ready to start enjoying your DVD recorder. It’s possible,
Playback however, that you may want to make a couple of
additional settings, depending on how the recorder is set
Use the / (cursor up/down) buttons to select up for terrestrial TV broadcasts.
Connected, or Not Connected, then press ENTER. • Manual channel setting – This setting lets you skip
• If you select Not Connected, that completes the channels where there is no station, as well as
setup. Press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator, or manually tune to stations. See Manual CH Setting on
select Go Back if you want to go back and start again. page 100.
• Select the digital audio formats your AV amplifier/ • VIDEO Plus+ channel setting – This setting lets you
receiver is compatible with. assign guide channels to ensure that the VIDEO
Plus+ programming system works correctly. See Set
Initial Setup
VIDEO Plus+ CH on page 101.
Basic AV Amp Compatibility
Clock Set • Setting up the remote to control your TV – You can set
Tuner Input Line System up the supplied remote control to control many
Video In/Out On Screen Display
Audio In Front Panel Display Dolby Digital brands of TV. See Setting up the remote to control your
Audio Out Power Save Dolby Digital, DTS
Language Remote Control Set PCM only TV on page 112.
Recording Setup Navigator
Playback

27
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 28 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

04 Getting started

1 If they aren’t already on, switch on your TV and


Selecting the hard disk or DVD for this recorder.
Press  STANDBY/ON to switch on.
playback and recording • Make sure that the video input on your TV is set to this
The HDD and DVD buttons (remote control and front recorder.
panel) are used to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for
playback and recording. The indicator in the front panel 2 Press HDD to record to the HDD, or DVD to record
display shows which is currently selected. to a recordable DVD.
If you choose to record to the HDD, skip to step 5 now.

  3 Press  OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray.

HDD DVD 4 Load a blank DVD-R or DVD-RW disc with the


label side face-up, using the disc guide to align the
disc.
• When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc, the
recorder will take a moment to initialize it for
recording.
Making your first recording 5 Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to select the TV
This quick guide shows you how to make a basic channel you want to record from.
recording of a TV program on either the HDD, or to a • You can also use the +/– buttons on the front panel if
recordable DVD. the recorder is stopped.
Recording is covered in much more detail in chapter 6 • Channel presets are numbered 1–99.
(Recording). • If the recorder is connected to your TV using a SCART
cable and your TV supports Direct Recording, it’s
possible to quickly start recording whatever channel
STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE
your TV is tuned to. See Direct recording from TV on
  page 48 for detailed instructions.

HDD DVD 6 Press  REC to start recording.


• By default, the recording will be in SP (standard play)
mode, which will give you around two hours of
recording from a blank DVD disc.
• You can pause recording by pressing  PAUSE.
Press  REC or  PAUSE again to restart recording.
CHANNEL
7 When you want to stop recording, press
STOP REC.

Playing back your recording


The TV program you just recorded should be on the HDD
or DVD disc as a single title with one or more chapters.
PLAY

• Press  PLAY to start playback.


STOP
If you want to stop playback before the end of the
recording, press  STOP.
REC STOP REC


DVD RECORDER

28
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 29 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Getting started 04

• If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also


Using the built-in TV tuner select the language.

NICAM A NICAM B
Changing TV channels Regular NICAM A+B
There are three different ways to select TV channels. Note
that you can’t change the TV channel during playback, • You can also select the language for a non-NICAM
recording or during recording standby. bilingual broadcast.

A (L) B (R)
A + B (L+R)

CHANNEL • When watching a recording made from an external


input with Bilingual recording selected (see External
Audio on page 103), you can switch the audio
channel between left (L), right (R) or both (L+R).
ENTER
L R
L+R
• CHANNEL +/– buttons on the remote
• Number buttons on the remote – For example, to Note
select channel 4, press 4 then ENTER; for channel 34,
• When recording to the HDD, or in Video mode, or in
press 3, 4, ENTER.
VR mode using the FINE/MN32 setting, only one
• +/– buttons on the front panel channel of a bilingual broadcast is recorded. In this
case, decide which language you want to record
Note before recording by setting the Bilingual Recording
setting (see Bilingual Recording on page 104).
• Channel presets are numbered 1–99.
• You can’t change TV channels during playback or
Switching between TV and DVD
recording, or while in recording standby.
When the recorder is stopped or recording you can
choose whether to have the audio/video from the built-in
Changing audio channels TV tuner (or external input) play on your TV (‘DVD mode’),
You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or or watch the channel that the TV is currently set to (‘TV
external input signal. mode’).
During playback or when a menu is being displayed on-
screen, the sound and video is always routed to your TV
AUDIO and is unaffected by the TV/DVD mode setting.
Note that the recorder must be connected to your TV
using a SCART cable to be able to use this feature.

• Press AUDIO to change the audio.


The current audio channel is displayed on-screen.
TV/DVD

• If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM Select on


page 103) is set to NICAM and you are watching a
NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM
and Regular (non-NICAM) audio.

NICAM • Press TV/DVD to switch between TV mode and


DVD mode.
Regular

29
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 30 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

04 Getting started

3 Press  OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray.


Basic playback 4 Load a disc.
This section shows you how to use your recorder for Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc
playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of tray guide to align the disc (if you’re loading a double-
video from the HDD. More playback features, such as sided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to
repeat and program play, are covered in the next chapter. play face down).
• If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read
Important the note on page 32.

• Throughout this manual, the term ‘DVD’ means 5 Press  PLAY to start playback.
playback-only DVD-Video discs and DVD-R/RW. If a • If you’re playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc
function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it menu may appear when you start playback. Use the
is specified. /// (cursor) buttons and ENTER to navigate
DVD disc menus, and the number buttons and
• Some DVD-Video discs don’t allow certain playback
ENTER for Video CD menus.
controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This
is not a malfunction. • When playing video from the HDD, playback will
automatically stop after the end of a title is reached.
• See the following sections for more details on playing
STANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE
specific kinds of discs.
  6 To stop playback, press  STOP.
7 When you’ve finished using the recorder, eject
the disc and switch the recorder back into standby.
• To open/close the disc tray, press  OPEN/CLOSE.
Remove the disc before putting the recorder into
standby.
• Press  STANDBY/ON to switch the recorder into
standby.

ENTER

PLAY

STOP

DVD RECORDER

1 Press  STANDBY/ON to switch on.


Also turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the
correct video input.
2 Press HDD to playback from the HDD, or DVD to
play a DVD.
If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 5 below.

30
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 31 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Getting started 04

Playing DVD discs Playing from the HDD


The table below shows the basic playback controls for The table below shows the basic playback controls when
DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs. playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD).

PLAY Press to start playback. PLAY Press to start playback.


If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play- If RESUME is displayed on-screen, play-
back starts from the place last stopped. back starts from the place last stopped.
Playback automatically stops after the end
STOP Press to stop playback. of a title is reached.
You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing  PLAY. (Press  STOP STOP Press to stop playback.
again to cancel the resume function.) You can resume playback from the same
point by pressing  PLAY. (Press  STOP
PAUSE Pauses playback, or restarts playback again to cancel the resume function.)
when paused.
PAUSE Pauses playback, or restarts playback
REV SCAN FWD SCAN Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly when paused.
to increase the scanning speed.
REV SCAN FWD SCAN Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
PREV NEXT Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title. to increase the scanning speed.
(You can also use the front panel +/– but-
tons to do this during playback.) PREV NEXT Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title.
(You can also use the front panel +/– but-
Except VR mode: During playback, enter a tons to do this during playback.)
chapter number then press ENTER to skip
directly to that chapter within the currently During playback, enter a title number then
playing title. press ENTER to skip directly to that title.
CLEAR
On some discs, you can also use the num- Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
ber buttons to select numbered items in start again.
ENTER CLEAR
the disc menu.
VR mode only: During playback, enter a
ENTER
title number then press ENTER.
All: Press CLEAR to clear a number entry
and start again. BACK CM SKIP (Commercial back/skip) Each press skips
backward/forward progressively up to a
BACK CM SKIP (Commercial back/skip) Each press skips maximum of 10 minutes forward or three
backward/forward progressively up to a minutes back.
maximum of 10 minutes forward or three
minutes back. STEP/SLOW During playback, press to start slow-
motion playback. Press repeatedly to
STEP/SLOW During playback, press to start slow- change the playback speed.
motion playback. Press repeatedly to While paused, press to advance a single
change the playback speed. frame in either direction.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame in either direction.

Press to display the ‘top’ menu or menu of


TOP MENU MENU a DVD-Video disc (these are often the
same).

Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD-


Video disc menus; press ENTER to select
ENTER
items.

RETURN Press to return to the previous level of a


DVD-Video disc menu.

31
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 32 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

04 Getting started

Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs Playing Video CD/Super VCDs


The table below shows the basic playback controls for The table below shows the basic playback controls for
audio CDs, and WMA/MP3 files. Video CD/Super VCDs.
Some discs feature Playback Control (PBC for short)
PLAY Press to start playback.
menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you
load them and display a menu on-screen from where you
STOP Press to stop playback.
can select what to watch.

PLAY Press to start playback.


Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed on-
PAUSE Pauses playback, or restarts playback
screen, playback starts from the place last
when paused.
stopped.
REV SCAN FWD SCAN CD and MP3 only: Press to start scanning. STOP Press to stop playback.
Press again to increase the scanning Video CD only: You can resume playback
speed. (There are two scan speeds; the from the same point by pressing  PLAY.
current scan speed is shown on-screen.) (Press  STOP again to cancel the resume
function.)
PREV NEXT Press to skip to previous/next track (or
folder for WMA/MP3 disc). (You can also PAUSE Pauses playback, or restarts playback
use the front panel +/– buttons to do this when paused.
during playback.)
REV SCAN FWD SCAN Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly
During playback, enter a track number
to increase the scanning speed.
then press ENTER to skip directly to that
track. PREV NEXT Press to skip to previous/next track. (You
Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and can also use the front panel +/– buttons to
CLEAR
start again. do this during playback.)
ENTER
When a PBC menu is displayed, press to
display the previous/next page.

During playback, enter a track number


Note then press ENTER to skip directly to that
track.
• If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and
recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/ CLEAR
start again.
receiver with a digital connection. Noise will be While a PBC menu screen is displayed,
output through the analog outputs. Also make sure ENTER
use to select numbered menu items.
that STEREO is selected using the AUDIO button
(see Switching audio channels on page 44). BACK CM SKIP Video CD only: Each press skips backward/
• Scanning doesn’t work with WMA tracks. forward progressively up to a maximum of
10 minutes forward or three minutes back.
Note that this function doesn’t work when
playing in PBC mode.
STEP/SLOW During playback, press to start slow-
motion playback. Press repeatedly to
change the playback speed.
While paused, press to advance a single
frame (forward direction only).
RETURN Press to display the disc menu of a Video
CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode.

32
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 33 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Getting started 04

Note Note
• When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, • Some options in the Home Menu may be grayed out
such as search, repeat and program play are not sometimes, indicating that they are not available at
available. You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD in the present time. For example, the Photoviewer
non-PBC mode by pressing  to start playback option is grayed out unless there is a disc loaded that
instead of  PLAY. contains JPEG image files.

Using the Home Menu Displaying disc information on-


From the Home Menu screen you can access all the screen
features of the recorder. Press HOME MENU to display You can display various on-screen information about the
the Home Menu screen: disc loaded or the HDD.

Timer Recording Disc Setup


 
Disc Navigator Initial Setup

Copy Video/Audio Adjust HDD DVD


Disc History Play Mode

PhotoViewer DV Record

DVR-520H/720H screen

Use the /// (cursor) buttons followed by ENTER


to select the option you want. To exit the Home Menu,
press HOME MENU.

ENTER
HOME
MENU RETURN

Home menu options DISPLAY

Timer Recording Disc Setup (page 92)


(page 49)
1 Press DISPLAY repeatedly to display/change the
Disc Navigator (page 36, Initial Setup (page 97)
on-screen information.
page 76)
• Press once to show the HDD and removable disc
Copy (page 61) Video/Audio Adjust (DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the
(page 94) status of just the currently selected playback/
recording device (HDD or removable disc).
Disc History (page 89) Play Mode (page 40)
• The on-screen display automatically disappears after
PhotoViewer (page 90) DV Record (DVR-520H/ 150 minutes.
720H only) (page 57)
2 To hide the information display, press DISPLAY
repeatedly until it disappears.
The example displays below are a guide only; actual
displays vary according to the disc loaded, etc.

33
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 34 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

04 Getting started

HDD and removable disc activity display 5 Recording time remaining


Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and removable disc Shows the approximate recording time left on the disc in
(DVD, etc.) activity. Use the HDD and DVD buttons to the current recording mode.
switch between the two kinds of display.
6 Preset name and number
The example displays below show high-speed copying Shows the preset name and preset number for the
from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback. currently selected channel.
Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD) 7 Audio mode
Shows the broadcast audio mode for the current channel
HDD DVD-RW Video
preset (Mono, Stereo, etc.).
Remain 10h35m Hi-Speed Copy Remain –h––m
Stop Stop 8 Copy control information
0h08m left
Shows recording restrictions of the current channel
program.

Rec Mode SP(2h00m/DVD)


9 Disc name
Shows the disc name.
HDD DVD-RW Video (For CDs, this area shows playable files other than CD
Remain 10h35m Remain 0h52m audio tracks; for example, Multi-format: WMA/MP3.)
Chase Play Stop
Rec 10 Finalized
Shows Finalized if a recordable DVD is finalized.
11 TV/DVD mode
Recording time Shows the current mode of the recorder (see Switching
Relative playback position between TV and DVD on page 29).

Stop display 2
Stop display 1
1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

 Stop ABC Pr 1
 Stop ABC Pr 1 DVD-RW VR Stereo
DVD-RW VR Resume Stereo Original 14:52 MON 15/11/2004 Copy Once
Original FINE (1h00m/DVD) Rem. 0h35m Copy Once
Finalized
Titles : Original 99 Play List 15
Disc Name : Comedy shows Lock Disc : On
DVD Mode TV Mode

9 10 11 1 Date and time


1 DVD-RW Original / Play List 2 Number of titles/tracks on disc
If a VR mode disc is loaded, this shows whether playback For a VR mode DVD-RW, the number of Original and Play
is currently set to Original or Play List. List titles are shown separately.
During preview playback of the Copy List, this shows
Copy List. Play display 1
2 Disc type and mode
1 2 3 4 5
Shows the disc type (HDD, DVD-R, DVD-RW, CD, etc.),
and the disc mode for recordable DVD, if applicable (VR
or Video).  Play 3–2 0. 00. 15
DVD-R Video Chapters 15
Title Total 0. 11. 52
3 Recording mode and time
Shows the current recording mode (FINE, SP, LP, etc.),
and the total recording time of the disc. DVD Mode

4 Resume
Shows Resume if playback can be resumed from the last
place stopped.

34
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 35 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Getting started 04

1 Number of chapters in title 4 Remaining recording time available


Shows the amount of space left on the disc in the current
2 Current title and chapter number
recording mode.
(For CD/Video CD/Super VCD, shows current track; for
WMA/MP3, shows current folder and track; for JPEG 5 Recording mode
disc, shows current folder and file.) Shows the current recording mode (FINE, SP, LP, etc.),
and the total recording time of the disc.
3 Elapsed title time
(For CD, WMA, MP3, Super VCD, shows elapsed track
time; for Video CD, shows elapsed disc time.) Note
4 Total running time of title • When using the simultaneous play and record
feature, the display shows information for playback
5 Angle indicator only.
Lights during multi-angle scenes.
• During real-time copy, the copy source playback
information is displayed.
Play display 2
• Data transfer rate shows the amount of video and
1 audio information recorded on the disc. It is not an
2 3 4 5
indication of picture/audio quality.
 Play 3–2 0. 00. 15 !
• The Video mode disc displays become the same as a
DVD-R Video Chapter Time 0. 00. 21 DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized.
Chapter Total 0. 01. 52
 4.32Mbps • The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis
Hi-Speed Copy is calculated based on a 12cm/4.7GB disc at the
Title Name : 21/11 Football match
displayed record setting.
• Recording and playback times for TV recordings are
1 Chase playback, simultaneous record/playback,
approximately 0.1% shorter than the actual time. This
copy, disc back-up
is because of the slightly different frame rates of TV
Indicates that recording, copying or back-up is in
broadcasts versus DVD.
progress.
• The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time
2 Elapsed chapter time display when the disc is paused.
3 Total running time of chapter • Copy Once or Can’t Record messages may appear
in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that
4 Data transfer rate the broadcast TV program contains copy control
Shows the current data rate being read from the disc. information.
5 Copy protected material (!)
Shows ‘!’ if the playback material is copy-once protected.

Recording display

1 2 3 4

 Rec 3 0. 00. 15 ABC Pr 1


DVD-R Video 21:00 – 22:00 Stereo
FINE (1h00m/DVD) Rem. 0h35m Copy Once

DVD Mode

1 Current title number


2 Elapsed recording time
3 Timer recording start and stop times
Shows the start and stop times if the current recording is
a timer recording.

35
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 36 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

05 Playback

Chapter 5
Playback

Introduction Using the Disc Navigator to browse


Most of the features described in this chapter make use the contents of a disc.
of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the /// Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc
 (cursor buttons) and ENTER. To go back one level and start playback.
from any screen, use the RETURN button. Remember
also that the button guide at the bottom of every screen
shows which buttons do what.
Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the HDD DVD
HDD, DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3
discs and CDs, although the exact operation of some
varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. The following
icons are provided to help you quickly identify which
instructions you need for which kind of disc.

DVD Any kind of DVD, DVD-R or DVD-RW


DISC NAVIGATOR

DVD-Video Commercially produced DVD or finalized


Video mode DVD-R/RW ENTER
HOME
MENU
Video mode Video mode DVD-R/RW (unfinalized)

VR mode VR mode DVD-RW

HDD HDD

CD Audio CD

Video CD Video CD
Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only
discs
Super VCD Super VCD DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3

WMA/MP3 WMA or MP3 files 1 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Navigator’
from the on-screen display.
MP3 MP3 files Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD or WMA/
MP3 disc, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR, which takes
• Some DVD-Video discs don’t allow certain playback you straight to the Disc Navigator screen.
controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This
is not a malfunction.
• When playing Video CDs, some functions, such as
Timer Recording Disc Setup
making a program list, are not available in PBC
Disc Navigator Initial Setup
mode. Stop the disc first, then start playback by
pressing . Copy Video/Audio Adjust

Disc History Play Mode


• For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see The
PhotoViewer DV Record
PhotoViewer on page 90.
DVR-520H/720H screen

2 Select what you want to play.


Use the /// (cursor buttons) to highlight items
and ENTER to select.

36
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 37 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Playback 05

Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc 1 Press HDD or DVD to select the hard disk drive or
Navigator looks slightly different. the DVD drive.
The screen for DVD discs shows the titles on the left and 2 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Navigator’
the chapters on the right. Select a title, or a chapter from the on-screen display.
within a title. Alternatively, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR to go
straight to the Disc Navigator screen.
Disc Navigator

Title (1-10) Chapter (1-003) 3 Select ‘Play’ from the menu options.
DVD Title 01 Chapter 001 Press ENTER to move to the thumbnails area of the
Title 02 Chapter 002
Title 03 Chapter 003 screen.
Title 04
Title 05
Title 06
Title 07 Disc Navigator
Title 08 Video Mode
DVD 1 2 3

The screen for CDs and Video CDs shows a list of tracks.
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP DVD Remain
Play 0h37m(FINE)
Disc Navigator Erase 4 5 6
Ttl Name
Track (1-10) Total Time 0.58.25 Lock
CD Track 01 Erase All
Track 02
Track 03 Undo 1/1
Track 04
Track 05
Track 06
Track 07 4 Use the /// (cursor buttons) to select a
Track 08
title to play.

The screen for WMA/MP3 discs shows a list of folders 5 Press ENTER to start playback.
and tracks. Select a folder or a track within a folder.
Note
Disc Navigator

Folder (1-03) Track (1-004)


• It’s not possible to use the Disc Navigator when
WMA/MP3 01.Rock 001.Intro playing a Video CD in PBC mode.
02.Pop 002.Escape
03.Dance 003.Everything You Say • Another way to find a particular place on a disc is to
004.What I Do
use the time search mode. See Search Mode on
page 40.

Playback starts after you press ENTER.


Changing the thumbnail picture for a title
• For discs that contain both CD-Audio tracks and
WMA/MP3 tracks, you can switch the playback area VR mode Video mode HDD
between CD and WMA/MP3. This can only be done You can change the thumbnail picture that appears for
while the disc is stopped. each title in the Disc Navigator screen using the NAVI
MARK button.
Using the Disc Navigator with recordable ENTER

discs and the HDD


VR mode Video mode HDD PLAY

When used with a recordable disc or the HDD, the Disc PAUSE

Navigator gives you access to all the editing features of


STEP/SLOW
this recorder as well as the ability to browse and play
titles. See also Editing on page 76 for more on editing
recordable discs. NAVI
MARK

37
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 38 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

05 Playback

1 Start playback of the title you want to change CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3
the thumbnail for.
2 Press NAVI MARK anywhere in the title to make 1 During playback, use the number buttons to
the displayed picture the thumbnail for that title. input a track number.
• For greater control over the exact frame you want to For example, for track 6, press 6; for track 24, press 2,
use, you can use the  PAUSE and/or slow-motion/ then 4.
frame advance/reverse controls ( / ). • To clear and start again, press CLEAR.
2 Optionally: Press ENTER.
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback
will jump to the new track.
Navigating discs and the HDD
ALL

During playback you can easily jump to another title, Scanning discs
chapter or track on a disc using the number buttons on
You can fast scan discs at various speeds, forwards or
the remote.
backward.

CLEAR REV SCAN PLAY FWD SCAN

ENTER

1 During playback, press or to start


reverse or forward scanning.
• The scanning speed is shown on-screen.
2 Press the same button repeatedly to increase the
DVD-Video Video mode scanning speed.
1 During playback use the number buttons to
enter a chapter number within the current title. DVD HDD
For example, for chapter 6, press 6; for chapter 24, • Forward:
press 2, then 4. SCAN 1  SCAN 2  SCAN 3  SCAN 4
• To clear and start again, press CLEAR. • Reverse:
2 Optionally: Press ENTER. Reverse play  SCAN 1  SCAN 2  SCAN 3
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback  SCAN 4
will jump to the new chapter.
CD Video CD Super VCD MP3
VR mode HDD
• Forward/Reverse:
SCAN 1  SCAN 2
1 During playback, use the number buttons to
input a title number. 3 To resume normal playback, press  PLAY.
For example, for title 6, press 6; for title 24, press 2,
then 4.
Note
• To clear and start again, press CLEAR.
• Depending on the disc, reverse playback may not be
2 Optionally: Press ENTER. smooth.
• Alternatively, just wait a few seconds and playback
• Sound can be heard while scanning audio CDs
will jump to the new title.
(analog output only).
• Scanning is not possible with WMA files.
38
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 39 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Playback 05

• No subtitles are displayed while scanning DVD-Video


discs. Note

• Analog and digital sound is output when scanning • The picture quality during slow motion playback is
DVDs with Dolby Digital or Linear PCM sound on not as good as during normal playback and depends
forward SCAN 1. (Linear PCM is output from the on the disc being played.
optical digital output.*) No sound is output when • Reverse slow-motion playback may not be as smooth
using other scan speeds. as forward and may be better with some discs than
* Except during chase playback and simultaneous others.
recording/playback. • Depending on the disc, normal playback may
• No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, automatically resume when a new chapter is reached
except on forward SCAN 1. (Linear PCM is output on a DVD disc.
from the optical digital output during forward • No sound is output during slow-motion playback.
SCAN 1).
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may
automatically resume when a new chapter is reached
on a DVD disc.
Frame advance/frame reverse
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD

You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc or the


Playing in slow motion HDD frame-by-frame. With Video CD/Super VCDs, you
DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD
can only use frame advance.

You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs


and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in
either direction, while Video CD/Super VCDs can only be
played forwards in slow motion.
PLAY

PAUSE

STEP/SLOW

PLAY

1 During playback, press  PAUSE.


STEP/SLOW

2 Press or to back up or advance one frame.


• Hold down or for continuous frame reverse/
frame advance.
1 Press or to start slow motion reverse or 3 To resume normal playback, press  PLAY.
forward playback.
2 Press the same button repeatedly to change the Note
slow motion speed.
• The picture quality when using frame reverse is not
SLOW 1/16 SLOW 1/8 as good as frame advance.
• Depending on the disc, normal playback may
SLOW 1/2 SLOW 1/4 automatically resume when a new chapter is reached
3 To resume normal playback, press  PLAY. on a DVD disc.

39
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 40 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

05 Playback

Search Mode
The Play Mode menu ALL
ALL The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a
The Play Mode menu gives you access to search specified point in a disc by time or by title/chapter/folder/
functions, repeat and program play functions. track number.
1 Select ‘Search Mode’ from the Play Mode menu.
Important 2 Select one of the search options.
• You can’t use the Play Mode features with Video CD/ 3 Use the number buttons to enter a title/chapter/
Super VCDs playing in PBC mode, or while a DVD folder/track number or the search time (in hours,
disc menu is being displayed. For other restrictions, minutes & seconds).
see the following sections.
Play Mode

Search Mode Time Search Input Time


PLAY MODE A-B Repeat Title Search
Repeat Chapter Search 0.01.00
Program

CLEAR Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25 minutes


into the current title, press 2, 5, 0, 0. For 1 hour and 15
minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0.
ENTER Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 45 minutes into
the disc, press 4, 5, 0, 0.
Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For example, for track 6,
press 6. Alternatively, you can use the / (cursor up/
PLAY

down) buttons.
4 Press ENTER.
1 Press PLAY MODE to display the Play Mode menu
screen. Tip
• You can often select what you want to watch on a
Play Mode
DVD disc from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP
Search Mode
A-B Repeat
Time Search
Title Search
MENU to display the disc menu.
Repeat Chapter Search
Program

Note
• When using time search, playback may occasionally
start slightly before or after the time you input.
• You can also access the Play Mode menu from the • Time search doesn’t work with Super VCDs.
Home Menu (press HOME MENU).
2 Use the /// (cursor buttons) and ENTER A-B Repeat
to navigate.
DVD CD Video CD HDD
• To exit the Play Mode menu, press HOME MENU or
PLAY MODE. The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points
(A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is
played over and over.

Important
• You can’t use A-B Repeat with WMA/MP3 or Super
VCD discs.

40
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 41 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Playback 05

1 During playback, select ‘A-B Repeat’ from the VR mode


Play Mode menu.
• For VR mode DVD discs, select Repeat Disc, Repeat
2 With ‘A (Loop Start)’ highlighted, press ENTER at Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat Off).
the point you want the loop to start.
DVD-Video Video mode HDD
Play Mode

Search Mode A (Loop Start) • For HDD, DVD-Video and Video mode DVD discs,
A-B Repeat B (Loop End)
Repeat Off
select Repeat Title or Repeat Chapter (or Repeat
Program Off).

CD Video CD Super VCD

• For CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select Repeat


After setting the loop start point, the highlight will
Disc or Repeat Track (or Repeat Off).
automatically move down to B(Loop End).
3 With ‘B (Loop End)’ highlighted, press ENTER at WMA/MP3
the point you want the loop to end.
Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and • For WMA/MP3 discs, select Repeat Disc, Repeat
plays the loop round and round. Folder or Repeat Track (or Repeat Off).
• When playing a DVD-Video/Video mode DVD, or from 3 To resume normal playback, select ‘Repeat Off’
the HDD, the start and end points of the loop must be from the Repeat Play menu.
in the same title. • You can also press CLEAR to cancel repeat play if no
menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is
4 To resume normal playback, select ‘Off’ from the
displayed.
A-B Repeat menu.
• You can also press CLEAR to cancel A-B Repeat play
if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is Note
displayed.
• If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of
a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is canceled.
Note • If there is a program list, you can also select Repeat
• If you switch camera angles while using A-B Repeat Program to repeat the program list.
with a DVD-Video disc, A-B repeat is canceled.
Program play
Repeat play DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3
ALL
This feature lets you program the play order of titles/
There are various repeat play options, depending on the chapters/folders/tracks on a disc.
kind of disc loaded, or if you’re using the HDD for 1 Select ‘Program’ from the Play Mode menu.
playback. It’s also possible to use repeat play together
with program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the 2 Select ‘Input/Edit Program’ from the list of
program list (see Program play below). program options.
1 Select ‘Repeat’ from the Play Mode menu.
Play Mode
2 Select a repeat play mode. Search Mode Input/Edit Program
A-B Repeat Start Program Play
Repeat Cancel Program Play
Play Mode Program Erase Program List

Search Mode Repeat Disc


A-B Repeat Repeat Title
Repeat Repeat Chapter
Program Repeat Off

The Program edit screen that appears depends on the


kind of disc loaded.

41
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 42 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

05 Playback

On the left side is the program list, then to the right is a 4 Repeat step 3 to build up a program list.
list of titles (DVD), folders (WMA/MP3), or tracks (CD, A program list can contain up to 24 titles/chapters/
Video CD/Super VCDs). On the far right is a list of folders/tracks.
chapters (DVD) or tracks (WMA/MP3).
5 To play the program list, press  PLAY.
3 Select a title, chapter, folder or track for the Program play remains active until you turn off program
current step in the program list. play (see below), erase the program list (see below), eject
For a DVD disc, you can add a whole title, or a chapter the disc or switch off the recorder.
within a title to the program list.
• To add a title, select the title.
Tip
• To add a chapter, first highlight the title, then press
 (cursor right)and select a chapter from the list. • To save your program list and exit the program edit
screen without starting playback, press HOME
MENU or PLAY MODE.
Program
Step Title (1-38) Chapter (1-004) • You can change the program list by selecting Input/
01. 01-003 Title 01 Chapter 001
02. Title 02 Chapter 002
Edit Program from the Play Mode Program menu.
• During program play, press  to skip to the next
03. Title 03 Chapter 003
04. Title 04 Chapter 004
05.
06.
Title 05 program step.
Title 06
07.
08.
Title 07
Title 08
• Press CLEAR during playback to switch off program
play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc Navigator, is
displayed). Press while stopped to erase the program
For a CD or Video CD/Super VCD, select a track to add to list.
the program list.
Other Program play functions
Program
Step
As well as creating and editing a program list, you can
Track (1-12) Total Time 0.00.00
01. 04 Track 01 start program play, cancel program play, and erase the
02. Track 02
03. Track 03
program list from the Play Mode menu.
04. Track 04
05. Track 05 1 Press PLAY MODE and select ‘Program’ from the
06. Track 06
07. Track 07 list of functions on the left.
08. Track 08
2 Select a program play function.
• Input/Edit Program – See above
For a WMA/MP3 disc, you can add a whole folder, or a
track within a folder to the program list. • Start Program Play – Starts playback of a saved
program list
• To add a folder, select the folder.
• Cancel Program Play – Turns off program play, but
• To add a track, first highlight the folder, then press 
does not erase the program list
(cursor right) and select a track from the list.
• Erase Program List – Erases the program list and
Program
turns off program play
Step Folder (1-06) Track (1-010)
01. 01-003 01. Pop 001. Track 01
02. 02. Electronic 002. Track 02 Note
03. 03. Jazz 003. Track 03
04. 04. Indie 004. Track 04
05. 05. Rock 005. Track 05
• When playing a program list of DVD-Video chapters,
06. 06. Classic 006. Track 06 chapters not included in the program list may be
07. 007. Track 07
08. 008. Track 08 sometimes be played, depending on the disc.
• You can use repeat play with program play. Start
After pressing ENTER to add the title/chapter/folder/ playback of the program list then select Program
track, the step number automatically moves down one. Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode menu (see
Repeat play on page 41).
• To insert a step into the program list, highlight the
step number where you want to insert another step,
then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After
pressing ENTER, all the subsequent steps move
down one.
• To delete a step from the program list, highlight the
step you want to delete, then press CLEAR.

42
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 43 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Playback 05

Displaying and switching subtitles Switching DVD soundtracks


DVD-Video DVD-Video

Some DVD discs have subtitles in one or more When playing a DVD disc recorded with two or more
languages; the disc box will usually tell you which soundtracks (often in different languages), you can
subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle switch the soundtrack during playback.
language during playback. Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack
Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle options.
options.

AUDIO

SUBTITLE

• Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an audio


soundtrack.
CLEAR

Audio : 1/2 Dolby Digital 2/0CH


1 Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a subtitle
option.
The current subtitle language is shown on-screen and in
the front panel display.

Subtitle: 1/2 English Note


• The sound may drop out for a few seconds when
switching soundtracks.
• Some discs only allow you to change audio language
The toucan lives in tropical forests
from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to access.
• To set audio language preferences, see Audio
2 To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then
Language on page 105.
CLEAR.
• Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS
soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when
Note DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack,
• Some discs only allow you to change subtitle connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV amp/
language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to receiver with built-in DTS decoder via the digital
access. output. See Connecting to an AV amplifier/receiver on
page 19 for connection details.
• To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on
page 106.

43
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 44 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

05 Playback

Switching audio channels Switching camera angles


VR mode CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3 DVD-Video

For VR mode content recorded with bilingual audio, you Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or
can switch between left (L) channel, right (R) channel, or more angles—check the disc box for details: it should be
both (L+R). marked with a icon if it contains multi-angle scenes.
When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon
between stereo, just the left channel or just the right appears on screen to let you know that other angles are
channel. available (this can be switched off if you prefer—see
Some Super VCD discs have two soundtracks. With Angle Indicator on page 111).
these discs you can switch between the two soundtracks
as well as individual channels in each.
ANGLE

AUDIO

• To switch the camera angle, press ANGLE.


• The angle number is displayed on-screen.
1 To display/switch the audio channel, press • If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the
AUDIO repeatedly. new angle.
The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated on-
• Repeat play is canceled if you change the angle while
screen.
repeat playback is active.

VR mode
Note
• L+R – Both channels (default)
• You can also change the angle from some DVD-Video
• L – Left channel only disc menus. Press TOP MENU to access.
• R – Right channel only

CD Video CD WMA/MP3

• Stereo – Stereo (default)


• 1/L – Left channel only
• 2/R – Right channel only

Super VCD

• 1 Stereo – Soundtrack 1 / Stereo (default)


• 1 L – Soundtrack 1 / Left channel
• 1 R – Soundtrack 1 / Right channel
• 2 Stereo – Soundtrack 2 / Stereo
• 2 L – Soundtrack 2 / Left channel
• 2 R – Soundtrack 2 / Right channel

Note
• When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode
disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital
soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot switch
the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby
Digital  PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 104)
or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch
the audio channel.
44
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 45 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Recording 06

Chapter 6
Recording
• The maximum number of titles that can be recorded
About DVD recording on a DVD-R/RW disc is 99.
This recorder can record on both DVD-R and DVD-RW • The maximum number of chapters recordable on a
media. The main difference between the two is that DVD- DVD-R/RW disc is 999.
R discs can only be recorded once, while DVD-RW can be • No more recording is possible on a disc that already
recorded, erased and re-recorded many times. contains the maximum number of chapters/titles.
A further difference between the two disc types is that
only DVD-RW can be initialized for VR mode recording,
which offers much more comprehensive editing
functions compared to Video mode recording. About HDD recording
The big advantage, however, of Video mode is its Recording to the internal hard disk drive (HDD) is
compatibility with standard DVD players, most of which basically similar to recording to a VR mode DVD-RW disc.
will not play VR mode DVD-RW discs (see also the notes You have the full choice of recording quality options,
below). including the manual mode, and of course you can
While DVD-R discs can only be recorded using the Video record, erase and re-record as many times as you like.
mode, you can initialize a DVD-RW disc for Video or VR The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can
mode recordings. Once initialized (any previous content store many hours of video on it, even in the higher quality
is erased in this operation), all recordings on that disc recording modes. To help you organize the contents, the
will be in the chosen recording mode. HDD is divided into four groups. You can name and use
these groups as you like—for example, you might have a
group for movies, another for TV shows, and one for
Important
camcorder recordings.
• You cannot play, edit or record on unfinalized DVD-R/
RW discs recorded in Video mode on other DVD
recorders. (Likewise, unfinalized Video mode discs Important
recorded on this recorder are not playable on other • It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on
players/recorders.) the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure
• This recorder cannot record onto CD-R or CD-RW that the Input Line System setting (page 98) matches
discs. the TV line system of the source you’re recording.
• Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure
due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the Note
recorder.
• The maximum number of titles that can be recorded
• Fingerprints and small scratches on a disc can affect on the HDD is 250.
playback and/or recording performance. Please take
• You can record up to 102 hours of video (in EP mode)
proper care of your discs.
on the internal 80GB (gigabyte) hard disk (HDD) on
• Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM, the DVR-420H/ 520H, or up to 204 hours on the
NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix multiple TV line 160GB DVR-720H.
systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and
• The maximum number of chapters per title
SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also
recordable on the HDD is 99.
Input Line System on page 98.
• No more recording is possible on the HDD after the
maximum number of titles has been reached.
Note
• The maximum continuous recording time is six
• Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, hours.
are compatible with VR mode DVD-RW discs. Check
the operating instructions for your player for VR
mode compatibility information.

45
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 46 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

06 Recording

Recording time and picture quality Restrictions on video recording


There are four preset recording quality modes: • You cannot record copy-protected video using this
• FINE – Highest quality setting, gives about one hour recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video
of recording time on a DVD disc. discs and some satellite broadcasts. If copy-
protected material is encountered during a
• SP (Standard Play) – Default quality, sufficient for
recording, recording will pause automatically and an
most applications, gives about two hours of
error message will be displayed on-screen.
recording time on a DVD.
• Video that is ‘copy-once only’ can only be recorded on
• LP (Long Play) – Slightly lower video quality, but
the HDD or a DVD-RW disc in VR mode (see below).
doubles the recording time on a DVD to around four
hours. • When recording a TV broadcast or through an
external input, you can display copy control
• EP (Extended Play) – Use when maximum recording
information on screen. (see Displaying disc
time is most important; EP gives you around six
information on-screen on page 33).
hours of recording time on a DVD disc.
In addition to these settings, you can access 32 different
recording quality/time settings when manual recording CPRM
mode is on (see Manual Recording on page 107), giving CPRM is a copy protection system with scramble system
you precise control over the recording. regarding the recording of ‘copy once’ broadcast
programs. CPRM stands for Content Protection for
When setting a timer recording there is a further option,
Recordable Media.
AUTO, which maximizes the recording quality for the
space available on the disc loaded at the time of This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that
recording. (If recording to the HDD, the recording quality you can record copy-once broadcast programs, but you
is maximized to fit on to a DVD disc.) cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM
recordings can only be made on CPRM-compatible DVD-
In all except the FINE/MN32 modes, sound is recorded in
RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted in VR mode or on
two channel Dolby Digital format. When set to FINE/
the HDD.
MN32, sound is recorded in high quality, uncompressed
Linear PCM format. DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that
are specifically compatible with CPRM.
If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording
in Video mode or to the HDD, or in VR mode on the FINE/
MN32 setting, use the Bilingual Recording setting Recording equipment and copyright
(page 104) to select the A/L or B/R audio channel to Recording equipment should be used only for lawful
record before recording starts. copying and you are advised to check carefully what is
• Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM, lawful copying in the country in which you are making a
NTSC and PAL-60, you can’t mix multiple TV line copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or
systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception
SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also or consented to by the rightowners.
Input Line System on page 98. • This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by method claims of
certain U. S. patents and other intellectual property
Note
rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other
• Note that all recording times (both here and those rights owners. Use of this copyright protection
shown by the recorder) are only approximate. This is technology must be authorized by Macrovision
because of the way that the video is recorded; you Corporation, and is intended for home and other
may get slightly more or slightly less, depending on limited viewing uses only unless otherwise
what you’re recording. authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

46
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 47 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Recording 06

Setting the picture quality/recording Basic recording from the TV


time VR mode Video mode HDD

VR mode Video mode HDD Follow the instructions below to record a TV program.
Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set Recording starts immediately and continues until the
the picture quality/recording time. There are four disc is full or you stop the recording.
standard settings available, which allow you to choose a
balance between picture quality and recording time.
It’s also possible to create a fifth, ‘manual’ setting for
picture quality/recording time. Before you can select this,
however, you will need to set the Manual Recording HDD DVD
option in the Initial Settings menu (see Manual Recording AUDIO

on page 107).

REC MODE

CHANNEL

• Press REC MODE repeatedly to select a recording ENTER

setting.
• FINE – Fine picture quality
• SP – Standard play
PAUSE
• LP – Long play
• EP – Extended play
• MN – Manual (available only when manual recording REC STOP REC REC MODE


is on)
The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and
shown on-screen together with the recording time for a
blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the
approximate remaining recording time for that disc is
also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting
(see On Screen Display on page 98) is Off then this
information is not displayed.) DVD RECORDER

1 Press HDD or DVD to record to the hard disk drive


or a recordable DVD respectively.
• If you’re recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if
you load a new blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder
takes a short while to initialize the disc).
2 Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to select the TV
channel to record.
The front panel display shows the channel number:

23 30 PR 7
Channel preset

• While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the


number buttons on the remote to select the channel.
(For channel 6, press 6 then ENTER; for channel 24,
press 2, 4 then ENTER)
47
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 48 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

06 Recording

• If the recorder is stopped, you can also use the +/– Direct recording from TV
buttons on the front panel to select the channel If you connected this recorder to your TV using a SCART
number. cable, and your TV supports Direct Recording, you can
3 Use the REC MODE button to set the picture record whatever is currently being shown on the TV
quality/recording time. without having to worry about what channel preset the
• See Setting the picture quality/recording time above recorder is on. Check the instructions that came with
for detailed instructions. your TV if you’re not sure whether your TV supports this
feature.
4 Use the AUDIO button to select the audio
channel to record.
See Changing audio channels on page 29 for more on PAUSE

this.
• When recording in VR mode, if a broadcast is
REC STOP REC REC MODE
bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing 
you to switch the audio channel on playback. The
only exception to this is when the picture quality is set
to FINE/MN32, in which case you do need to select
TV DIRECT
the audio channel before recording. REC

5 Press  REC to start recording.


If you want to set a recording end time, press the  REC
1 If necessary, load a recordable disc.
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30
minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The 2 Set the picture quality/recording time using the
time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the REC MODE button.
front panel display. When the recording ends, the
recorder automatically switches into standby if no other 3 Press TV DIRECT REC to start recording.
operation is being performed. If you want to set a recording time, press the  REC
button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30
• To cancel the set recording time, press  REC. minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. You
• If you want to pause recording at any time, press can see the recording time on-screen and in the front
 PAUSE. Press again to restart the recording. (If panel display. When the recording ends, the recorder
recording to the HDD or in VR mode, a new chapter automatically switches into standby if no other operation
is started after recording restarts) is being performed.
6 To stop the recording, press STOP REC. • To cancel the set recording time, press  REC.
• If you set the recording time in the previous step, you • If you want to pause recording at any time, press
can still stop the recording anytime by pressing  PAUSE. Press again to restart the recording. (If
STOP REC. recording to the HDD or in VR mode, a new chapter
• Recording will stop automatically when there is no is started after recording restarts)
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after six hours of 4 To stop the recording, press STOP REC.
HDD recording (whichever is sooner). • If you set the recording time in step 3, you can still
stop the recording anytime by pressing STOP REC.
Tip • Recording will stop automatically when there is no
more space on the HDD/DVD, or after six hours of
• During recording you can turn on/off the SCART loop HDD recording (whichever is sooner).
through function. During recording, press the front
panel + button to switch to SCART THRU (loop
through on), or – to switch to SCART NORM (loop
though off). Note that you can’t switch loop through Tip
on if recording from the AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER) • You can press TV DIRECT REC while the recorder is
or AV1(RGB)-TV connectors. Also, loop through is in standby to switch on and immediately start
automatically reset to off after recording has recording.
finished. • Please note that you can’t record from another
component (VCR, etc.) that is connected by a SCART
cable to the AV2/(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector
using the TV Direct Recording feature.

48
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 49 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Recording 06

Important
Setting a timer recording
• A timer recording can’t be set if:
VR mode Video mode HDD – Auto Start Recording is in progress.
Using the timer recording features you can program up – There are already 32 timer programs waiting to be
to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer recorded.
recording programs can be set to record just once, every • Timer recording will not start if:
day, or every week. – The recorder is already recording.
You can set the recording quality for your timer recording – A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized.
in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the • Timer recording will start when the operation
added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the preventing timer recording has finished.
recording quality for the space available on the disc (if • If a recordable DVD that doesn’t support
recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if simultaneous playback and recording (see
recording to HDD). Simultaneous recording and playback on page 55) is
You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable playing when a DVD timer recording is due to start,
DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly) playback will automatically stop to allow the
HDD timer recordings that you don’t need to keep, you recording to start.
can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to • The timer indicator ( ) lights in the front panel
automatically replace the previous timer recording with display when the timer is active. If the indicator is
the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the blinking it means that (for a DVD timer recording)
previous recording made on that timer program will be there is no disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not
replaced by the next one, regardless of whether you have recordable (for an HDD timer recording it means that
watched it yet or not. the HDD is not recordable).
You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the • Timer recordings have higher priority than the Auto
recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc Start Recording function (see Automatic recording
if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set from a satellite tuner on page 56). A timer recording
(see Optimized Rec on page 108 for more on this). will interrupt an Auto Start Recording. (Auto Start
Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but Recording will resume after the timer recording has
there isn’t a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the finished.)
recording, the Recovery Recording feature will • Approximately two minutes before a timer recording
automatically record the program to the HDD for you. is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording
This recorder is compatible with VPS (Video standby. In timer recording standby you cannot use
Programming System) and PDC (Program Delivery some functions.
Control) systems used by many TV stations to ensure that • The maximum length for timer recordings made to
a timer recording catches the whole program even when the HDD is 24 hours. However, because one title is
the program is not running to schedule. Up to eight timer limited to six hours, recordings over six hours will be
programs can be set with VPS/PDC on. spread over two or more titles. Note that there will be
a break in the recording of a few seconds between
titles.
• VPS/PDC may not work with all broadcast stations in
your country/area. Check with the stations for
compatibility.

49
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 50 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

06 Recording

Easy Timer Recording • DVD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets
As the name suggests, Easy Timer Recording makes the best recording quality for the space available on
setting up a timer recording as simple as possible. the disc loaded at the time of recording.
• HDD recording: The AUTO option automatically sets
the best recording quality that would fit on to a blank
DVD disc.
• Press DVD to record to DVD disc, or HDD if you want
to record to the hard disk drive.
HDD DVD
3 Use /// (cursor buttons) to move the
cursor to the recording start date and time on the
grid.
• You can move the cursor forward or back an hour at
a time using the and buttons.
CHANNEL

Current time
Recording start time

Easy Timer Recording


ENTER
HOME
MENU RETURN
8:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00
13/12
14/12
15/12

MON 13/12 11:45 - -:- -


CHANNEL +/– Pr 7 REC MODE FINE HDD/DVD HDD

REC MODE

  Each row of the grid is one day (you can set the timer
EASY
TIMER recording for up to a month in advance). Each column is
a 15 minute interval.
The darker area represents time that has already passed
and can’t therefore be selected. The lighter area is time
that’s available.
4 Press ENTER to set the start time.
DVD RECORDER The start date and time is displayed in the middle of the
screen.
1 Press EASY TIMER. • You can go back and reset the start time if you need
Alternatively, you can also access from the Home Menu to by pressing RETURN.
(press HOME MENU and select Timer Recording then
5 Use the / (cursor left/right) to move the
Easy Timer Recording).
cursor to the recording end time on the grid.

Easy Timer Recording Recording start time


Recording end time
8:00 9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00
13/12
Easy Timer Recording
14/12
15/12
11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00
MON 13/12 9:30 --:-- 13/12
14/12
15/12
CHANNEL +/– Pr 7 REC MODE FINE HDD/DVD HDD

MON 13/12 11:45 13:45


2 Set the TV channel and recording quality. CHANNEL +/– Pr 7 REC MODE FINE HDD/DVD HDD
• Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to set the channel you
want to record.
As you move the cursor around the grid, an arrow
• Use the REC MODE button to set the recording stretches from the start time to the current cursor
quality. Press repeatedly to switch between FINE, SP, position, representing the length of the recording. A
LP, EP and AUTO (and MN if manual recording mode recording of up to six hours can be set.
is on).

50
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 51 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Recording 06

6 Press ENTER to set the end time. • The amount of free space available on the HDD and
the currently loaded recordable DVD is shown
7 Select ‘Yes’ to set the timer recording and exit, or
towards the bottom of the screen.
‘No’ to go back to the timer recording screen.
• You can check the timer recording details you just set • In the lower-right corner, the number of timer
from the main timer recording screen (see Standard programs already set and the number that use VPS/
timer recording below). PDC, is shown next to Tmr Pgms.
• If there are more than eight timer programs already
set, press NEXT  to switch page (go back using
Note the PREV  button).
• You can’t use VPS/PDC with Easy Timer Recording. • You can also clear a timer program before it’s started
Use the standard or VIDEO Plus+ timer recording (before the recorder enters timer recording standby)
methods if you want to use VPS/PDC. by highlighting it and pressing CLEAR.
2 Select ‘New Input’ to set a new timer program,
Standard timer recording then press ENTER.
The timer recording screen you can see all the timer
programs already set, clear programs and set up new Timer Recording
ones.
Date Start Stop CH Rec Mode
12/12 SUN 10 00 -- -- Pr 7 SP

CLEAR
Rec to Group VPS/PDC
HDD GROUP 1 OFF Program Set

Ttl Name Input

ENTER
HOME
MENU

3 Enter the timer recording settings.


Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select a field;
use the / (cursor up/down) buttons to change the
value.
PREV NEXT • Date – Choose a date up to one month in advance, or
TIMER REC
select a daily or weekly program.
 
• Start – Set the recording start time.
• Stop – Set the recording end time (maximum length
of a timer recording is 24 hours for HDD recording or
1 Press TIMER REC to display the Timer Recording
six hours for DVD).
screen.
You can also access the Timer Recording screen from • CH – Choose a channel (1–99, excluding skip
the Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select Timer channels), or one of the external inputs from which to
Recording, then Timer Recording (View)). record.
This screen shows all the timer programs currently set. • Mode – Select FINE, SP, LP, EP or AUTO (See
Recording time and picture quality on page 46). If
Manual Recording is on, then you can also select the
Timer Recording
Date Start Stop CH Mode Rec to VPS/PDC
MN setting.
MON 13/12 7:00 8:00 Pr 3 FINE HDD Off
EVERY TUE 9:00 10:00 Pr 5 FINE HDD On
• Rec to – Select HDD for hard disk recording or DVD
New Input for DVD recording. Select HDD for Auto Replace
Recording (daily or weekly timer recording only).
• Group – Select a record group (for HDD recording
only).
HDD Remain 10h20m(FINE) 1/1
DVD Remain 0h43m(FINE) • VPS/PDC – The VPS/PDC system automatically
adjusts the recording time so that even if a program
• Each row is for one timer recording program, with the is not running to schedule you won’t miss it. For VPS/
date and time information, channel, recording mode, PDC to work properly, you must input the correct
DVD or HDD and the VPS/PDC setting. announced time and date of the program you want to
record. Up to eight timer recordings can be set with

51
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 52 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

06 Recording

VPS/PDC on. Timer recording using the VIDEO Plus+®


Note that VPS/PDC may not work with every station
and that Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/
programming system
PDC is on. This system makes programming timer recordings very
simple. Most TV guides publish PlusCode programming
• Ttl Name Input – Optionally, you can enter a name numbers with their program details. If you want to make
for the recording up to 32 characters. (Highlight a timer recording of a program, you just input the
Program Set then press  (cursor down) to access corresponding code. The date, start, stop and channel
this option.) settings are made automatically. All you have to do is tell
4 After entering all the timer recording the recorder the recording mode, and whether it’s a
information, highlight ‘Program set’ and press once-only recording or a regular recording.
ENTER.
The timer recording list screen is displayed again. The
timer program you just input appears in the list. The
rightmost column shows various timer recording status
messages:
HDD DVD
• Standby is displayed when the recorder is in timer
recording standby.
• Recording is displayed when a timer recording is in
progress.
5 To exit the timer recording screen, press HOME
MENU. VIDEO Plus+

CLEAR

Note
• For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see ENTER
HOME
Optimized Rec on page 108) is set to On (and VPS/ MENU

PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the recording


quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the
recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1
recording quality then the Recovery Recording
feature will automatically make the recording to the
HDD instead. REC MODE

 
• If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an
Auto Replace Recording may not complete
successfully.
• If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed 1 Press ‘VIDEO Plus+’ to display the VIDEO Plus+
copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to program screen.
start, the new timer recording will not replace the old You can also access this screen from the Home Menu
one. However, the next time the timer recording (press HOME MENU, select Timer Recording, then
starts, both of the older two programs will be erased. VIDEO Plus+).
• If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you
must switch the recorder into standby before the VIDEO Plus+

timer recording is due to start for it to work correctly. PlusCode# 39924 0 9 to input

For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need REC MODE to change


Rec Mode MN21
to switch the recorder into standby. to change level

Rec Times Once Daily Weekly to change

Rec to HDD HDD DVD to change


Tip
VPS/PDC Off   to change
• Stations that use VPS/PDC typically include VPS/
PDC information in the teletext TV guide pages. • Use the number buttons to enter the PlusCode
Please refer to these when setting your timer programming number. (To clear the last digit
recording. entered, press CLEAR.)

52
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 53 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Recording 06

• Press REC MODE to select FINE, SP, LP, EP or AUTO


(See Recording time and picture quality on page 46). If Important
Manual Recording is on, then you can also select the • You can’t use this feature until you have set up the
MN setting. guide channels. See Set VIDEO Plus+ CH on
• Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select the page 101.
Once, Daily or Weekly recording option. • You can’t change the recording mode.
• Press HDD to record to the hard disk drive, or DVD to • You can’t program daily or weekly timer recordings.
record to a DVD.
1 Press ’VIDEO Plus+’.
• Use the  and  buttons to switch VPS/PDC On The front panel display shows the current recording
or Off. mode and prompts you to enter the PlusCode
2 After making the settings, press ENTER. programming number.
The program details are shown at the bottom of the
screen for a few seconds then the screen is automatically P L US CODE
exited.
• If you haven’t set up the guide channels (or at least 2 Use the number buttons to enter the PlusCode
the guide channel for the PlusCode programming programming number.
number that you entered), the recorder will prompt
you to enter the channel number that the TV program 2 9 32 4
is showing on.
• To clear the last digit entered, press CLEAR.
• Use the PREV  / NEXT  button to switch VPS/
Tip
PDC on/off. With VPS/PDC on, the front panel VPS/
• You can check the timer program settings by PDC indicator lights. (Note that a maximum of 8
pressing TIMER REC to display the timer recording timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC on.)
screen.
3 Press ENTER.
The display shows the timer settings:
VIDEO Plus+ programming with the power Date  Start time  End time  HDD and Recording
off channel.
You can enter a PlusCode programming number when • If CODE ERROR appears in the display, check that
the recorder is in standby. Note that the recording is the PlusCode programming number is correct and
always made to the HDD. If you want to record to a DVD that the guide channel is set (see Set VIDEO Plus+
disc, you’ll need to switch on the power and use the full CH on page 101), then set the timer recording again.
VIDEO Plus+ program screen.
• If CAN’T SET appears in the display, it means that
although you entered a valid PlusCode programming
number, the program has already finished.

VIDEO Plus+

CLEAR

ENTER

PREV NEXT

 

53
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 54 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

06 Recording

Extending a timer recording in progress 2 Use the  (cursor up) button to highlight the
You can extend a timer recording beyond the current timer recording (‘Recording’ is shown in the
programmed end time in two different ways. This can be ‘VPS/PDC’ column), then press ENTER.
useful if a broadcast program overruns, for example. A screen showing details of the timer recording appears.
From this screen, only the recording stop time can be
CLEAR changed.

Timer Recording

ENTER
Date Start Stop CH Rec Mode
HOME
MENU 13/12 SAT 7 00 8 00 Pr 3 FINE

Rec to Group VPS/PDC


HDD GROUP1 OFF Program Set

Ttl Name Input

PREV NEXT

REC STOP REC TIMER REC

 3 Set a new Stop time for the timer recording.


Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select the
hour or minute field, then use the / (cursor up/down)
buttons to change the time.
Moving the end time by 30-minute blocks 4 Press ENTER to set the new time and exit the
1 During timer recording, press and hold  REC for screen.
three seconds. Recording will continue until the new stop time is
The timer indicator disappears from the front panel reached.
display.
2 Press  REC repeatedly to extend recording in 30 Canceling and stopping a timer recording in
minute increments. progress
After a timer recording has started, you can cancel the
Programming a new end time program (but continue recording), or stop recording
Note that it is only possible to program a new end time for completely if you need to.
a timer recording when VPS/PDC is off.
1 During timer recording, press TIMER REC to
display the Timer Recording screen. REC STOP REC
You can also access the Timer Recording screen from 
the Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select Timer
Recording, then Timer Recording (View)).

Timer Recording 1 During timer recording, press and hold  REC for
Date Start Stop CH Mode Rec to VPS/PDC three seconds.
12/13 MON 7:00 8:00 Pr 3 FINE HDD Recording
EVERY TUE 9:00 10:00 Pr 5 FINE HDD On Only the program is canceled (the timer indicator
New Input disappears); recording continues so that you can
manually stop recording whenever you like.
2 When you want to stop recording completely,
HDD Remain --h--m(FINE) 1/1
press STOP REC.
DVD Remain 0h43m(FINE)

54
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 55 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Recording 06

Preventing use of the recorder before a


timer recording (child lock) Simultaneous recording and
You can make all the front panel and remote control playback
buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is
useful when you set a timer recording and want to make VR mode HDD
sure that the timer settings are not changed before
A feature called Chase Play makes it possible to watch a
recording has finished.
recording in progress (DVD or HDD) from the start of the
1 If the recorder is on, switch it into standby. recording (as in, playback is ‘chasing’ the recording). For
example, perhaps you have to miss the first 30 minutes of
2 Press and hold  STOP on the front panel for a movie on TV; you can start recording, then start
three seconds to lock the controls. watching the movie, from the beginning, while the
The front panel display briefly shows LOCK. If any buttons recorder is still recording 30 minutes ahead of you.
are pressed on the remote or front panel, LOCK is briefly
displayed again. In fact, you’re not just limited to watching the recording
in progress; you can watch anything else already on the
• To unlock the recorder, press and hold  STOP on DVD or HDD by selecting it from the Disc Navigator
the front panel for three seconds until the display screen (see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable
shows UNLOCK. discs and the HDD on page 37).
• To cancel a timer recording when the recorder is
locked, first unlock the recorder (see above), then
press and hold  REC for three seconds. Important
• Note that you must use a DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 / 2x or
Ver. 1.2 / 4x disc to be able to use this feature.
• You may not be able to use this feature with a
Timer recording FAQ DVD-RW disc that was first initialized on another
recorder.

Frequently Asked Questions • During recording, press  PLAY to start playback


from the beginning of the current recording, or press
• Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesn’t start DISC NAVIGATOR and select another title to play
recording! from there.
Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not You can use all the usual playback controls, such as
locked (see Lock Disc on page 92), and that there are pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip.
fewer than 99/250 titles already on the DVD/HDD. • To stop playback, press  STOP (recording will
continue).
• The recorder won’t let me enter a timer program! Why
• To stop recording, press STOP REC (playback will
not?
continue).
You can’t enter a timer program if the clock isn’t set.

• What happens when two or more timer programs Note


overlap? • You can’t start playback immediately after recording
Basically, the program with the earlier recording start starts.
time has priority. However, the recorder will start • When scanning a DVD, no sound is output if the
recording the program with the later start time after recorder is also recording the DVD (see Scanning
the earlier program is finished. If two programs have discs on page 38).
the same times (but different channels, for example),
• You can’t use this feature during Auto Start
the program set most recently takes priority.
Recording, or in Auto Start Recording standby (the
AUTO indicator is lit in the front panel display).
If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programs that are
programmed to start at the same time, then the • You can’t use simultaneous playback and recording
program that actually starts first takes priority. while copying or backing up.
• During recording or in timer recording standby, you
can’t play an HDD title, DVD or Video CD/Super VCD
disc if the Input Line System setting doesn’t match
the TV line system of the disc/HDD title (see also

55
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 56 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

06 Recording

Input Line System on page 98). Also, during Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio,
simultaneous recording and playback, if the TV line Bilingual Recording and DV Input are as you want them
system of the playback track/title changes then (see Audio In settings on page 103).
playback will automatically stop. • If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or
stretched), adjust on the source component or your
TV before recording.
3 Set up the recorder.
Recording from an external • Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See
component Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 47
for detailed information.
VR mode Video mode HDD
• Press HDD to record to the hard disk drive, or DVD to
You can record from an external component, such as a record to a DVD.
camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorder’s
external inputs. 4 Press  REC when you’re ready to start
recording.
• DVR-520H/720H only: The recorder will only start
recording from the DV IN/OUT jack if there is a valid
signal. Recording will also pause if the signal is
 interrupted during recording.
HDD DVD

Note
• If your source is copy-protected using CopyGuard,
INPUT
SELECT
you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on
video recording on page 46 for more details.

CLEAR

Automatic recording from a satellite


ENTER
tuner
HDD

If you have a satellite tuner or some other kind of set top


box connected to the AV2/L1 input, you can have the
recorder start and stop recording automatically with the
timer settings of the connected component. (If the other
REC REC MODE
component doesn’t have a built-in timer, you’ll need to
 
use it with an external timer unit.)
After setting up for Auto Start Recording, this recorder
starts recording when it detects a signal from the other
component. When the signal ceases, the recorder stops
1 Make sure that the component you want to recording.
record from is connected properly to the DVD
recorder.
See Chapter 2 (Connecting up) for connection options. Important

2 Press INPUT SELECT repeatedly to select one of • It takes a little while for this recorder to switch on and
the external inputs to record from. start recording after detecting a signal. Please bear
There are two analog inputs and a DV digital input (DVR- this in mind when setting the timer.
520H/720H only). The current input is shown on-screen • If Auto Start Recording is set, it will not start if
and in the front panel display: another timer recording is in progress.
• AV2/L1 – Input 1/Auto Start Rec • Timer recordings take precedence over Auto Start
• L2 – Input 2 (front panel) Recording. Auto Start Recording will stop if a timer
recording is due to start. After the timer recording
• DV – DV input/output (front panel) (DVR-520H/720H has finished, Auto Start Recording will resume.
only)

56
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 57 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Recording 06

1 Set the timer for the satellite receiver (or other


component), then switch it into standby (if Recording from a DV camcorder
necessary).
Check the manual that came with the receiver if you’re (DVR-520H/720H only)
not sure how to do this. VR mode Video mode HDD
2 Check that the ‘Audio In’ settings for ‘External You can record from a DV camcorder connected to the
Audio’ and ‘Bilingual Recording’ are as you want DV IN/OUT jack on the front panel of this recorder. Using
them. the recorder’s remote, you can control both the
See Audio In settings on page 103 for more on these camcorder and this recorder.
settings.
Before recording, make sure that the audio input for the
3 Set up the recorder. DV IN/OUT jack is setup (see DV Input (DVR-520H/720H
• Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See only) on page 104).
Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 47
for detailed information.
4 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Timer Recording’,
then ‘Auto Start Recording’. 
5 Select ‘Yes’ to switch Auto Start Recording on, or HDD DVD
‘No’ to switch off.
6 Switch the recorder into standby.
The AUTO indicator in the front panel display lights.
The recorder will automatically switch on and start
recording when the other component comes on.
Recording stops when the external component switches CLEAR

off.
• To cancel Auto Start Recording, press  STANDBY/
ON while the recorder is in standby. The AUTO ENTER
HOME
indicator goes off. MENU RETURN

• To cancel Auto Start Recording once recording has REV SCAN PLAY FWD SCAN
already started, press  REC for three seconds, then
STOP REC. PAUSE STOP

• When a timer recording is in progress ahead of Auto STEP/SLOW


Start Recording, some functions, such as extending
REC MODE
the timer recording and chase play, are not available.  
Press the front panel + button for three seconds to
cancel Auto Start Recording without affecting the
timer recording. The AUTO indicator goes off.

Note Important
• Auto Start Recordings are always on the HDD. Auto • The source signal must be DVC-SD format
Start Recording to DVD is not possible.
• Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this
• You can’t set Auto Start Recording when: recorder’s remote.
• the recorder is recording or in timer recording • If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable,
standby. you cannot control the second unit from this one.
• the HDD is not recordable. • You can’t control this unit remotely from a
• the HDD already contains the maximum number component connected to the DV IN/OUT jack.
of titles (250). • You can’t record date and time information from DV
• AV2/L1 In is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on cassette.
page 102).

57
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 58 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

06 Recording

• During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or • Recording is automatically paused if the recorder
has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will detects no signal, or a copy-protected signal.
pause recording. Recording will restart automatically Recording restarts when there is a non-copy-
when there is a recordable signal. However, if there is protected signal.
more than 10 seconds of blank tape, the recorder will • You can pause or stop the recording by selecting
stop recording and the camcorder should stop Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on-screen display.
(depending on the camcorder). You cannot control the camcorder from this remote
• For best results when recording from a DV control during recording.
camcorder to this recorder, we recommend cueing • If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder,
the camcorder to the place you want to start the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not
recording from and setting the camcorder to play- be recorded. Use the pause button on your
pause. camcorder instead and recording will start
1 Make sure your digital camcorder is connected to immediately.
the front panel DV IN/OUT jack. • HDD and DVD-RW (VR Mode) only: A chapter marker
Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode. is inserted every time there is a break in the timecode
on the DV tape. This happens when the recording is
2 Set up the recorder.
stopped or paused then restarted, for example.
• Use REC MODE to set the recording quality. See
Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 47 • While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording
for detailed information. screen using the HOME MENU or RETURN button.
• Make sure a recordable disc is loaded if you want to
record to DVD. Note
3 From the Initial Settings menu, check that the DV • Depending on the connected camcorder, you may
audio input is setup as you require. not be able to control it using the remote control
See DV Input (DVR-520H/720H only) on page 104 for more supplied with this recorder.
on this. • If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read
• Check also that the Audio In settings for External correctly, the audio type will not switch
Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want automatically. You can switch the audio manually
them (see Audio In settings on page 103). from the External Audio setting (page 103).
• See also DV-related messages on page 117 if you
4 Press HOME MENU and select ‘DV Record’ from
encounter an error while using the DV IN/OUT jack.
the menu.
• DV recording only works when the digital camcorder
is in VTR mode with a tape loaded. Frequently Asked Questions
5 Select ‘Record to HDD’ or ‘Record to DVD’ to • I can’t get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder!
record to the hard disk drive or a recordable DVD Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also
respectively. make sure that what you’re trying to record is not
6 Find the place on the camcorder tape that you copy-protected.
want to start recording from. If it still doesn’t work, try switching off the camcorder
For best results, pause playback at the point from which then switch back on.
you want to record. • There’s a picture, but no sound!
• Depending on your camcorder, you can use this Try switching the DV Input setting (see DV Input
recorder’s remote to control the camcorder using the (DVR-520H/720H only) on page 104) between Stereo
,,, , , and buttons. 1 and Stereo 2.
7 Use the / (cursor up/down) buttons to select
‘Start Rec’ and press ENTER.

 Stop  Stop
1.02.22
Control with these
buttons Start Rec
Pause Rec
Stop Rec

HDD SP (2h00m/DVD)
Remain 1h40m

58
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 59 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Recording 06

Important
Recording from the DV output
• Once you’ve finalized a disc recorded in Video mode,
(DVR-520H/720H only) you can’t edit or record anything else on that disc.
VR mode Video mode HDD However, the finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe
‘undone’; see Undo Finalize on page 93 for how to do
You can record non-copy-protected material from the this.
hard disk drive or from a DVD to a camcorder connected
• A VR mode disc can still be recorded and edited on
to the DV IN/OUT jack.
this recorder even after finalizing.
1 Connect the camcorder to the DV IN/OUT jack of
1 Load the disc you want to finalize.
this recorder.
Make sure that the recorder is stopped before
2 Select the HDD or DVD for playback. proceeding.
3 Find the place you want to start recording from. 2 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.
4 Start recording on the camcorder. 3 Select ‘Finalize’.
5 Play the source material.
Disc Setup

Basic Finalize Next Screen


Initialize Undo Finalize Start
Finalize

Playing your recordings on other DVD


players
VR mode Video mode
4 Select ‘Finalize’ from the finalize options, then
Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs ‘Next Screen’.
recorded in Video mode. A number of players (including
many Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW discs 5 For Video mode discs only, select a title menu
recorded in VR mode, finalized or not. Check the manual style, then select ‘Yes’ to start finalization or ‘No’ to
that came with the player to check what kinds of discs it cancel.
will play. The menu you select will be the one that appears when
the ‘top menu’ is selected on any DVD player.
When you finalize a Video mode disc, a title menu is
created from which you can select titles when you play
Finalize
the disc. There are a number of different styles of title TITL E MENU TITLE MENU

menu to choose from to suit the content of the disc.


All the title menus are navigated in the usual way,
pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then
using the /// (cursor buttons) followed by
ENTER to select titles and start playback.

Finalizing a disc
• Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer
VR mode Video mode DVR-7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature.
Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc These discs will have only a text title menu when
can be played on a regular DVD player or computer finalized on this recorder.
equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive. 6 The recorder will now start finalizing the disc.
Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after During finalization:
you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you • If the finalization process is going to take more than
want it before you finalize the disc as it can’t be changed around four minutes, you can press ENTER to cancel.
afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc Around four minutes before completion, the option to
Name on page 92 before starting the steps below. cancel disappears.

59
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 60 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

06 Recording

• How long finalization takes depends on the type of


disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the Note
number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR • By default, the recorder initializes blank DVD-RW
mode can take up to one hour to finalize. A disc discs for VR mode recording. See DVD-RW Auto Init.
recorded in Video mode can take up to 20 minutes. on page 108 if you want to change the default to
Video mode.
Note • If a disc was previously finalized on an older DVD
recorder, you may not be able to re-initialize and/or
• If the TV line system of the disc is different to the initialize it for Video mode recording.
current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to
finalize the disc. See Input Line System on page 98 for
how to change the recorder’s setting.

Initializing a DVD-RW disc


DVD-RW

When you first load a blank disc, the recorder will


initialize it automatically for recording. You can also
manually initialize DVD-RW discs.
You can initialize a disc for either Video mode recording
or VR mode recording.

Important
• Initializing a disc will erase everything recorded on it.
Make sure there is nothing on the disc that you want
to keep!
• You may not be able to re-initialize a disc in a different
format if it was originally initialized on an older DVD
recorder.
1 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’.
2 Select ‘Initialize’.

Disc Setup

Basic VR Mode Start


Initialize Video Mode Start
Finalize

3 Select ‘Video Mode’ or ‘VR Mode’ from the


initialize options.
4 Select ‘Start’.
It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc.

Initializing Disc Pr 1

1 min left

60
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 61 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Copying and back-up 07

Chapter 7
Copying and back-up
that copying can be carried out at the maximum speed
Introduction possible.
Use the copying features of this recorder to: When copying from HDD to DVD, the speed of copying
depends on the recording mode and the kind of DVD disc
• Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to
you’re using. The table at the bottom of the page shows
a DVD
the minimum copying time for one hour of material.
• Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play
in another player.
Note
• Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing.
• Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD. • Not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying.
Check with the disc manufacturer for compatibility.
The simplest method of copying is to use the One Touch
Copy feature. Using this you can simply copy the title • There may be cases where even 2x/4x/8x compatible
that’s currently playing from HDD to DVD, or the other discs do not copy at full speed.
way around. • High-speed copying is not possible when using discs
For more complicated copying tasks you can make a initialized on another recorder.
Copy List which specifies precisely what needs to be • The table below shows disc brands that have been
copied. A Copy List is similar to a VR mode Play List in tested for 8x speed writing compatibility with this
many ways, and you’ll find that the Copy List commands recorder.
are similar to those available for editing a Play List.
Maker
A message showing that copying has finished is
displayed after copying. If the recorder is inactive and no Sony
That’s
button is pressed (remote or front panel) then the JVC
recorder will automatically go into standby after 20 Fujifilm
minutes. TDK
Maxell
Verbatim
High-speed copying Ritek
Copying between DVD and HDD is a completely digital
process and therefore involves no loss of quality in the (As of April, 2004)
audio or video. This means that you can transfer back
and forth without having to worry about the quality
getting worse with each copy ‘generation’. It also means

DVD disc type


Rec mode DVD-R Ver. 2.0 DVD-R Ver. 2.0/4x*3 DVD-R Ver. 2.0/8x*4

DVD-RW Ver. 1.1*1 DVD-RW Ver. 1.1/2x*2 DVD-RW Ver. 1.2/4x*3

EP 10 mins. 5 mins. 2.5 mins. 1.25 mins.

LP 15 mins. 7.5 mins. 4 mins. 2 mins.

SP 30 mins. 15 mins. 7.5 mins. 4 mins.

FINE 60 mins. 30 mins. 15 mins. 8 mins.

Note that all times in the above table are approximate.


*1
Compatible with single speed recording only
*2
Compatible with 2x speed recording
*3
Compatible with 4x speed recording
*4
Compatible with 8x speed recording. Note that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being recorded.

61
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 62 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

07 Copying and back-up

Real-time copying
Real-time copying is also possible, with the advantage One Touch Copy* (HDD to DVD)
that you can manually set a different recording mode The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing
from the original. For example, you can record a title title (or currently selected title in the Disc Navigator) from
originally recorded in FINE mode in SP mode. the HDD to DVD. The whole title is copied, regardless of
When real-time copying from the HDD to a Video mode where in the title you start copying. The recorder copies
DVD, the chapter markers in the original material are not at the maximum speed possible.
copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at For One Touch Copy to work, make sure that a recordable
intervals, according to the Auto Chapter (Video) setting DVD-R/RW disc is loaded.
(see also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 108).
* See also Copyright above.

Frame accuracy and copying


The Frame Accurate setting (see Frame Accurate on
ONE TOUCH
page 108) does not affect the actual video content on the COPY

HDD, but it does affect what can be copied and whether
high-speed copying can be used. HDD DVD

When Frame Accurate is set to Off, high-speed copying


can generally be used to copy titles in the Copy List using
a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc in VR or Video mode. However, • During HDD playback, press ONE TOUCH COPY to
copy-once protected material (see Restrictions on copy the current title to DVD.
copying below) can’t be added to the Copy List, and the The front panel display indicates that the title is being
divide points in edited titles may be out by as much as 0.5 copied. Playback continues while copying.
seconds when compared to the original.
When Frame Accurate is On, you can add copy-once Note
protected titles to the Copy List and divide points in
edited titles are maintained accurately. However, • Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail
depending on the content of the Copy List and the disc, it picture markers (Navimark) for the Disc Navigator,
may not be possible to use high-speed copying. are also copied. However, if you copy to a Video mode
DVD-R/RW, only the first 32 characters of a name are
copied.
Restrictions on copying
• The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly
Some video material is copy-once protected. This means
the same positions as the original when recording on
that it can be recorded to HDD, but it can’t then be freely
to a Video mode disc.
copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected
material from HDD to DVD, you’ll need to use a VR mode • You can’t use the One Touch Copy function to copy a
DVD-RW disc compatible with CPRM Ver. 1.1 or higher title if any part of the title is copy-once protected.
(see CPRM on page 46 for more on this). Only one • A title that contains mixed aspect ratios can’t be
instance of a copy-once protected title can be added to copied to a Video mode disc. Use a VR mode DVD-
the Copy List, and after it’s been copied, the title is erased RW disc for this type of material.
from the HDD (it is therefore not possible to copy a • Low resolution (EP or LP, or MN1–18) widescreen
locked title that is copy-once protected). material can’t be copied to a Video mode disc. Use a
You can identify copy-once protected material during VR mode DVD-RW disc for this type of material.
playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the
current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark
( ! ) is shown (see Play display 2 on page 35).
One Touch Copy* (DVD to HDD)
Copyright One Touch Copy from DVD to HDD copies a single title to
Recording equipment should be used only for lawful the HDD in real time. You can copy the currently playing
copying and you are advised to check carefully what is title or the currently selected title in the Disc Navigator.
lawful copying in the country in which you are making a When you start copying, playback jumps back to the start
copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or of the title, then continues through to the end of the title,
music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception when recording automatically stops. The copy will be
or consented to by the rightowners. made in the recording mode (FINE, SP, etc.) that is
currently set.
* See also Copyright above.

62
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 63 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Copying and back-up 07

• Thumbnail picture markers (Navimark) and chapter


markers for the Disc Navigator are copied, but their
ONE TOUCH
COPY
position in the copy may be slightly changed from the
 original.
HDD DVD • If some part of the title being copied is copy-
protected, copying will start, but the copy-protected
portions will not be copied.
• During DVD playback, press ONE TOUCH COPY to
copy the current title to HDD. Canceling One Touch Copy
Playback starts again from the beginning of the current You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it’s started.
title. The front panel display and an on-screen display
indicate that the title is being copied. • Press and hold ONE TOUCH COPY for more than
a second.
Copying is canceled and the video already copied is
Note erased.
• The maximum title length for copying is six hours.
• Title name and chapter markers are also copied, Note
except when copying from a finalized Video mode
• If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R copy, the space
disc.
available for recording does not return to the pre-
copy figure.

Copying from HDD to DVD*


Currently selected HDD title
Title that cannot be
added to Copy List

HDD to DVD Copy


All HDD Groups
HDD
1 2 3 4 Titles in the selected
HDD HDD Group
16:00 Sun 8/11 Pr 5 LP 1/3
Recording Time 0h32m55s Information for the
Copy List Add
DVD selected title
menu options Erase 1 2 3 4
Ttl Name Copy List titles
Divide
Combine Copy List Total 1h30m 1/2
Conf List Running time of the
Copy List

From the HDD to DVD Copy screen you can build up a


Copy List of titles to copy to DVD. From this screen you Important
can also edit chapters so that the titles appear as you • The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
want them on your finished DVD. • The Copy List is erased if the Frame Accurate setting
* See also Copyright on page 62. is changed in the Initial Settings menu (see Frame
Accurate on page 108), or if the Input Line System
setting is changed (see Input Line System on
page 98).

63
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 64 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

07 Copying and back-up

• Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see • When in the thumbnails area of the screen, use the
Resetting the recorder on page 112) will also erase the PREV () and NEXT () buttons to display the
Copy List. previous/next page if there are more titles/chapters
than will fit on the screen.
• As you highlight different thumbnails, information
about the title/chapter is shown in the central area of
the screen. Press DISPLAY to change the
information displayed.
ENTER • Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on
HOME
MENU RETURN the left from the thumbnail area of the Copy List
screen.
• When selecting HDD titles, you can display titles
from a particular HDD group by pressing  (cursor
up), then using the / (cursor left/right) buttons
PREV NEXT and ENTER to select a group. Press  (cursor down)
to get back to the HDD title thumbnail area.

DVD Copy
DISPLAY All
1 2 3 4

1 Make sure that there’s a recordable DVD disc


loaded.
HDD to DVD Copy List menu options
2 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Copy’.
Use the following commands when making an HDD to
DVD Copy List:
• Add – Add titles from the HDD to the Copy List (see
page 65).
Timer Recording Disc Setup

Disc Navigator Initial Setup


• Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see
Copy Video/Audio Adjust
page 66).
Disc History Play Mode • Title Name (Ttl Name) – Name or rename a title in
PhotoViewer DV Record the Copy List (see page 66).
• Divide – Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see
DVR-520H/720H screen page 66).
3 Select ‘HDD  DVD’. • Combine – Combine two adjacent titles in the Copy
The HDD to DVD Copy List screen appears. List into one (see page 67).
• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List
HDD to DVD Copy (see page 67).
HDD
All • Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List
1 2 3 4
(see page 67).
HDD
1/3 • Erase All – Erase the Copy List (see page 68).
Add • Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) – Edit chapters within a
Erase DVD
Ttl Name
Copy List title (see page 68):
Divide
Copy List Total 0h00m 1/1
• Erase – Erase a chapter.
Combine
Conf List
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two.
• Combine – Combine two chapters into one.
• Move – Change the chapter order.
• Use the / (cursor up/down) buttons to highlight • Preview – Check the chapter content.
the command you want from the menu options on • Erase Section (Erase Sec) – Erase a section of a title
the left, then press ENTER. Most commands require in the Copy List (see page 70).
you then to select a title (or chapter) or location from
• Confirm List (Conf List) – Confirm the Copy List and
the thumbnail views area of the screen. Use the /
go to the recording settings screen (see Recording
 (cursor left/right) followed by ENTER to do this.
the Copy List below).

64
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 65 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Copying and back-up 07

Recording the Copy List HDD to DVD Copy List commands


After putting together your Copy List, you’re ready to
record it.
Add
1 Select ‘Conf List’ to display the Copy List settings Use this command to add titles to the Copy List.
screen.
1 Select ‘Add’ from the Copy List menu options.
2 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select
the Recording Mode. 2 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the HDD to add to the Copy List, then
press ENTER.
HDD to DVD Copy

HDD
HDD to DVD Copy
HDD DVD-RW VIDEO Required 0h08m
All
Recording Mode High Speed HDD
1 2 3 4

Add Start HDD


Erase 16:00 Sun 11/8 Pr 5 LP 1/3
Copy List Total 1175MB Recording Time 0h32m55s
Ttl Name Current DVD Remain 2830MB
Divide Add
Combine
/ 4700MB Erase DVD 1 2 3 4
Ttl Name
Conf List
Divide
Combine Copy List Total 1h30m 1/2
Conf List

• High-Speed Copy – The Copy List is copied at the


same recording quality as the original. (See page 61
for more information on high-speed copying.) The thumbnail appears in the Copy List section in the
lower half of the screen. If there are already titles in the
• FINE, SP, LP, EP, MN – The Copy List is copied at the Copy List, the title is added at the end.
specified recording quality in real-time. (Note that if
you copy at a higher quality setting than the original, 3 Repeat step 2 to add more titles to the Copy List,
the copy will not be better quality than the original.) or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu
• If you select MN above, you can also change the level options.
setting (MN1–MN32) from the Recording Quality box
that appears. Note
• Optimized – The recording quality automatically • When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame
adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space Accurate on page 108), the following limitations on
available on the disc. Copying is carried out in real- adding titles to the Copy List apply:
time. – When adding titles that contain copy-once
When you change the recording mode setting, you can protected material, the copy-once parts will not be
see how much disc space it will require. If this is more added to the Copy List.
than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t be able – When adding titles that contain material of more
to start copying. In this case, either change the recording than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a
quality, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title.
screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List. – Widescreen material recorded in LP, EP or MN1–18
will not be added to the Copy List.
3 Select ‘Start’ to begin copying.
– Chapter markers on the copy may be up to 0.5
seconds off compared to the original.
Note • Only titles which were recorded in the same TV
• When the copy mode is set to something other than system as the recorder is currently set to can be
High-Speed Copy for copying to a Video mode DVD, added to the Copy List.
the chapter markers of the original are not copied.
Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular
intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see
also Auto Chapter (Video) on page 108).

65
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 66 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

07 Copying and back-up

Erase 3 Input a name for the selected title.


Use this command to erase individual titles from the
Copy List. Input Title Name

15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP


1 Select ‘Erase’ from the Copy List menu options. CAPS
ABC DE F GH I J KLM . , ? !
N O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z ( ) : ;
small AA A A A AÆ ç E E E E I I I I #
2 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select DN O OOO O ø UUUUY ß$%
a title from the Copy List to erase, then press ENTER. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ &
+ – /@ [ ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ± { _| } ~ ¡
c £ \ § ¨ © a– << ¬ – ® ˚
´ µ¶ · ¸ 1 –o 1/4 /2 /4 ¿
<<
2 3 1 3
`
HDD to DVD Copy OK Delete Space
All
HDD
1 2 3 4

HDD
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP 1/3 • Use the /// (cursor buttons) and ENTER to
Recording Time 0h32m55s
Add select characters.
Erase DVD 1 2 3 4
Ttl Name • A name generated automatically by the recorder will
Divide
Combine Copy List Total 1h30m 1/2 already be in the name input section of the screen.
Conf List Use the / buttons to change the cursor
position.
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-
3 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm that you want to erase the
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (/
title, or ‘No’ to cancel.
).
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to erase more titles from • You can also use the CLEAR button to delete
the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the characters directly (press and hold for two seconds
Copy List menu options. to delete the whole name). For other remote control
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to
Title Name (Ttl Name) input a name on page 80.
Use this command to name or rename titles in the Copy • Press RETURN to go back to the Copy List screen
List (the names of the original titles remain unchanged). without changing the name.
1 Select ‘Ttl Name’ from the Copy List menu 4 To confirm the name and return to the main
options. Copy List screen, highlight ‘OK’ and press ENTER.
2 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to name other titles in the
a title from the Copy List to name or rename, then Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy
press ENTER. List menu options.

HDD to DVD Copy Divide


All
HDD
1 2 3 4
Use this command to make two titles from a title already
in the Copy List.
HDD
15:00 Tue 6/10 Pr 5 LP 1/3
Recording Time 0h32m55s 1 Select ‘Divide’ from the Copy List menu options.
Add
Erase DVD 1 2 3 4
2 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select
Ttl Name
Divide a title from the Copy List to divide, then press ENTER.
Combine Copy List Total 1h30m 1/2
Conf List
HDD to DVD Copy
All
HDD
1 2 3 4

HDD
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP 1/3
Recording Time 0h32m55s
Add
Erase DVD 1 2 3 4
Ttl Name
Divide
Combine Copy List Total 1h30m 1/2
Conf List

66
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 67 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Copying and back-up 07

3 Use the playback controls to find the place you 3 Repeat step 2 to combine more titles, or press
want to divide the title. RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options.

Divide Title
Note
HDD 16:00 Sun 11/08 Pr 5 LP
Title 2 Recording Time 0h32m55s • When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame
2-1 0.08.13.26 Accurate on page 108), the following limitations apply
 Play Pause
when combining titles:
Divide – Mixed aspect ratios (16:9, 4:3, 4:3 (letter box)) can’t
Divide
Back
be combined.
– Mixed recording modes (EP/MN1–6, LP/MN7–18,
SP/MN19–31, FINE/MN32) can’t be combined.

You can use all the usual playback controls, including Preview
 PLAY,  PAUSE, scan ( , ), and slow-motion Use this command to check the content of a title in the
( , ). Copy List.
• Press RETURN or highlight Back and press ENTER to 1 Select ‘Preview’ from the Copy List menu
go back to the main Copy List screen, leaving the title options.
intact.
2 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select
4 With ‘Divide’ highlighted, press ENTER to divide a title from the Copy List to preview, then press
the title at the current playback position. ENTER.
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to divide other titles in the The selected title starts playing. You can return to the
Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy Copy List screen by pressing  STOP, otherwise
List menu options. playback will continue until the end of the Copy List.
• During preview, you can select a new thumbnail for
the Disc Navigator by pressing NAVI MARK.
Note
3 Repeat step 2 to preview other titles, or press
• When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame
RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options.
Accurate on page 108), the divide points may move by
up to half a second after selecting Divide.
Move
Combine Use this command to change the order of titles in the
Copy List.
Use this command to make a single title from two
adjacent titles in the Copy List. 1 Select ‘Move’ from the Copy List menu options.
1 Select ‘Combine’ from the Copy List menu 2 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select
options. a title from the Copy List to move, then press ENTER.
2 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select
HDD to DVD Copy
two adjacent titles from the Copy List to combine,
All
then press ENTER. HDD
1 2 3 4

HDD
HDD to DVD Copy 15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP 1/3
Recording Time 0h32m55s
All Preview
HDD
1 2 3 4 Move DVD 1 2 3 4
Erase All
HDD Chpt Edit
1/3 Erase Sec Copy List Total 1h30m 1/2
Conf List
Add
Erase DVD 1 2 3 4
Ttl Name
Divide
Combine Copy List Total 1h30m 1/2 The thumbnail appears in the Copy List section in the
Conf List lower half of the screen.

67
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 68 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

07 Copying and back-up

3 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select 1 Select ‘Chpt Edit’ from the Copy List menu
a new position for the title, then press ENTER. options.
The thumbnails in the Copy List reflect the new order.
2 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select
a title from the Copy List to edit, then press ENTER.
HDD to DVD Copy
All
HDD HDD to DVD Copy
1 2 3 4
All
HDD HDD
1 2 3 4
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP 1/3
Recording Time 0h32m55s
Preview HDD
Move DVD 1 2 3 4 15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP 1/3
Recording Time 0h32m55s
Erase All
Preview
Chpt Edit
Copy List Total 1h30m 1/2 Move DVD 1 2 3 4
Erase Sec
Erase All
Conf List Chpt Edit
Erase sec Copy List Total 1h30m 1/2
Conf List
Title to move

Copy List insertion point The chapter editing screen appears with thumbnails of
each chapter.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to move other titles in the
Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy 3 Select a command from the chapter edit menu
List menu options. options.

Erase All Chapter Edit

Use this command to erase the Copy List. HDD Title 15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP Chapter
2 Recording Time 0h32m55s ---h--m
1 2 3
1 Select ‘Erase All’ from the Copy List menu
options. 4 5 6
Erase
Divide
2 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then Combine 7 8 9
press ENTER. Move
Preview
Back 1/1
HDD to DVD Copy
All
HDD
1 2 3 4 Chapter edit menu
HDD
1/3 The following commands are available:
Preview
DVD
• Erase – Erase individual chapters: Use the ///
1 2 3 4
Move
Erase All  (cursor buttons) and ENTER to select a chapter to
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec Copy List Total 1h30m 1/2 erase. The chapter is erased after confirming.
Erase all titles ?
Conf List Yes No • Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more new
chapters: See Chapter Edit: Divide below.
• Combine – Combine two chapters into one: See
Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) Chapter Edit: Combine below.
The Chapter Edit option gives you access to several • Move – Change the order of the chapters: See
commands that you can use to edit chapters within a Chapter Edit: Move below.
Copy List title. • Preview – Check the content of a chapter: Use the
Editing chapters in a Copy List title does not change any /// (cursor buttons) to select a chapter, then
actual content on the HDD. It affects only how the press ENTER. Once the preview has started, press 
chapters appear after copying. STOP to return to the chapter edit screen.
4 Press RETURN to get back to the chapter editing
options on the left, or select another chapter
5 Select ‘Back’ (or press RETURN) to go back to the
main Copy List screen.

68
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 69 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Copying and back-up 07

Chapter Edit: Divide Chapter Edit: Combine


You can divide a chapter into as many new chapters as This command lets you combine two chapters into one.
necessary.
1 Use the /// (cursor buttons) to select the
1 Use the /// (cursor buttons) to select the space between the chapters to combine.
chapter to divide, then press ENTER.
Chapter Edit
2 Use the playback controls to find the place you
want to divide the chapter. HDD Title 15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP Chapter
2 Recording Time 0h32m55s ---h--m
1 2 3

Divide Chapter
4 5 6
Erase
HDD Title 12:18 Wed 7/10 SP Chapter Divide
1 Recording Time 0h01m24s 0h00m
Combine 7 8 9
1-3 0.00.52.17 Move
 Play Pause Preview
Back 1/1
Divide
Divide
Back
2 Press ENTER to combine.

Chapter Edit: Move


You can use all the usual playback controls, including This command lets you rearrange the chapters within a
 PLAY,  PAUSE, scan ( , ), and slow-motion Copy List title.
( , ). 1 Use the /// (cursor buttons) to select the
3 With ‘Divide’ highlighted, press ENTER to divide chapter you want to move, then press ENTER.
the chapter at the current playback position.
You can divide the chapter as many times as you want Chapter Edit

(up to 99 per title). HDD Title 15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP Chapter


2 Recording Time 0h32m55s 0h05m
4 Select ‘Back’ (or press RETURN) to get back to the 1 2 3

main Chapter Edit screen.


4 5 6
Erase
Divide
Combine
Note Move
7 8 9

Preview
• When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame Back 1/1
Accurate on page 108), the divide point may move by
up to half a second after selecting Divide.
2 Use the /// (cursor buttons) to select a
new position for the chapter, then press ENTER.

Title to move

Chapter Edit

HDD Title 15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP Chapter


2 Recording Time 0h32m55s ---h--m
1 2 3

4 5 6
Erase
Divide
Combine 7 8 9
Move
Preview
Back 1/1

Insertion point

The thumbnails in the chapter list reflect the new order.

69
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 70 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

07 Copying and back-up

Erase Section (Erase Sec) 6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 if you want to erase more
Using this command you can delete a part of a Copy List sections from the same title.
title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a 7 Select ‘Back’ (or press RETURN) to get back to the
recording made from the TV. main Copy List screen.
1 Select ‘Erase Sec’ from the Copy List menu
options. Note
2 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select • When Frame Accurate is set to Off (see Frame
the title you want to erase a section from, then press Accurate on page 108), the ‘From’ time and length of
ENTER. the erased section may differ by up to 0.5 seconds
After selecting a title, a screen appears from which you from that set.
can mark the start and end points of the section to erase.

Erase Sec

HDD 16:00 Sun 11/08 Pr 5 LP


Title 2
Recording Time 0h32m55s
2-1 0.06.52.17
 Play Pause

Erase Sec A B
From To
Back

3 Use the playback controls to find the start of the


section to erase, then (with ‘From’ highlighted) press
ENTER.
You can use all the usual playback controls, including
 PLAY,  PAUSE, scan ( , ), and slow-motion
( , ).
The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker
appears under the bar to show the start of the section.

 Play Pause

A B
From T
0.02.09.17

4 In the same way, find the end of the section to


erase, then (with ‘To’ highlighted) press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, another marker appears under the
bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself
marked in red.
5 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of
video either side of the marked section to see how the
edit will look.

70
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 71 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Copying and back-up 07

Copying from DVD to HDD*


Currently selected DVD title

DVD to HDD Copy


Original
DVD
1 2 3 4

DVD
16:00 Sun 8/11 Pr 5 LP 1/3
Recording Time 0h32m55s Information for the
Copy List Add
HDD selected title
menu options Erase 1 2 3 4
Move Copy List titles
Preview
Erase All Copy List Total 1h30m 1/2
Conf List Running time of the
Copy List

Use the DVD to HDD Copy screen to transfer video on


DVD to the hard disk.
* See also Copyright on page 62.
ENTER
HOME
Important MENU RETURN

• The DVD to HDD Copy screen is not accessible when


a finalized Video mode disc is loaded. However, you
can still use the One Touch Copy function (see One
Touch Copy* (DVD to HDD) on page 62).
PREV NEXT
• The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
• The copy list will be erased if:
– any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or
edited. DISPLAY

– the disc tray is opened.


– playback is switched between Original and Play
List. 1 Load the recordable DVD disc that contains the
– the DVD disc is re-initialized or finalized. material you want to copy to the HDD.
– the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see 2 Press HOME MENU and select ‘Copy’.
Resetting the recorder on page 112).
• It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that
was recorded on a different DVD recorder or PC.
Timer Recording Disc Setup

Disc Navigator Initial Setup

Copy Video/Audio Adjust

Disc History Play Mode

PhotoViewer DV Record

DVR-520H/720H screen

• Note that the Copy option will not be available if the


TV system of the recorder and the disc do not match.
(See Input Line System on page 98 for how to change
the TV system of the recorder.)

71
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 72 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

07 Copying and back-up

3 Select ‘DVD  HDD’.


The DVD to HDD Copy screen appears. Recording the Copy List
After putting together your Copy List, you’re ready to
DVD to HDD Copy
record it.
Original
DVD
1 2 3 4 1 Select ‘Conf List’ to display the Copy List settings
DVD screen.
1/3

Add
2 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select
Erase HDD the Recording Mode.
Move
Preview
Erase All Copy List Total 0h00m 1/1
DVD to HDD Copy
Conf List
Original
DVD
DVD HDD Required 1h30m

• Use the / (cursor up/down) buttons to highlight Recording Mode SP


the command you want from the menu options on
Add Start
the left, then press ENTER. Most commands require Erase Copy List Total 1h30m
you then to select a title or location from the Move Current HDD Remain 30h00m
Preview
thumbnail views area of the screen. Use the / Erase All
/ 34h00m

(cursor left/right) followed by ENTER to do this. Conf List

• When in the thumbnails area of the screen, use the


PREV () and NEXT () buttons to display the • High-Speed Copy – Only available when copying
previous/next page if there are more titles than will fit Original content from a VR mode disc. The Copy List
on the screen. is copied at the same recording quality as the
• As you highlight different thumbnails, information original. (See page 61 for more information on high-
about the title is shown in the central area of the speed copying.)
screen. Press DISPLAY to change the information • FINE, SP, LP, EP, MN – The Copy List is copied at the
displayed. specified recording quality in real-time. (Note that if
• Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on you copy at a higher quality setting than the original,
the left from the thumbnail area of the Copy List the copy will not be better quality than the original.)
screen. • If you select MN above, you can also change the level
setting (MN1–MN32) from the Recording Quality box
that appears.
When you change the recording mode setting, you can
DVD to HDD Copy List menu options see how much hard disk space it will require. If this is
Use the following commands when making a DVD to more than is available, it shows up in red and you won’t
HDD Copy List: be able to start copying. In this case, either change the
• Add – Select and add titles to the Copy List (see recording quality, or press RETURN to go back to the
page 73). Copy List screen and erase one or more titles from the
Copy List.
• Move – Change the order of titles in the Copy List
(see page 73). 3 Select ‘Start’ to begin copying.
• Erase All – Erase the Copy List (see page 74).
• Preview – Check the content of a title in the Copy List
(see page 74).
• Erase – Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see
page 73).
• Confirm List (Conf List) – Confirm the Copy List and
go to the recording settings screen (see Recording
the Copy List below).

72
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 73 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Copying and back-up 07

Erase
DVD to HDD Copy List commands Use this command to erase individual titles from the
Copy List.

Add 1 Select ‘Erase’ from the Copy List menu options.


Use this command to add titles to the Copy List. 2 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select
1 Select ‘Add’ from the Copy List menu options. a title from the Copy List to erase, then press ENTER.

2 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select DVD to HDD Copy
a title from the DVD to add to the Copy List, then Play List
DVD
press ENTER. 1 2 3 4

DVD
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP 1/3
DVD to HDD Copy Recording Time 0h32m55s
Play List Add
DVD Erase HDD 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 Move
Preview
DVD Erase All Copy List Total 1h30m 1/2
16:00 Sun 8/11 Pr 5 LP 1/3
Recording Time 0h32m55s Conf List
Add
Erase HDD 1 2 3 4
Move
Preview
Copy List Total 1h30m 1/2
3 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm that you want to erase the
Erase All
Conf List
title, or ‘No’ to cancel.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to erase more titles from
The thumbnail appears in the Copy List section in the the Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the
lower half of the screen. If there are already titles in the Copy List menu options.
Copy List, the title is added at the end.
3 Repeat step 2 to add more titles to the Copy List,
Move
or press RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu Use this command to change the order of titles currently
options. in the Copy List.
1 Select ‘Move’ from the Copy List menu options.
Note 2 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select
• Titles which were recorded directly to a VR mode disc a title from the Copy List to move, then press ENTER.
or have already been copied real-time, and which
contain bilingual audio or are recorded in recording DVD to HDD Copy
modes MN12–MN20 can be added to the Copy List, Play List
DVD
1 2 3 4
however if High-Speed Copy is selected they will not
actually be copied. DVD
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP 1/3
• Similarly, a copy-once protected title, recorded from Add
Recording Time 0h32m55s

the TV for example, can be added to the Copy List, but Erase HDD 1 2 3 4
Move
it will not be copied if High-Speed Copy is selected. Preview
Erase All Copy List Total 1h30m 1/2
• You may not be able to copy titles when copying a Conf List
disc that was created using a PC or another recorder.

73
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 74 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

07 Copying and back-up

3 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select Erase All


the insertion point for the title, then press ENTER. Use this command to erase the Copy List.
1 Select ‘Erase All’ from the Copy List menu
DVD to HDD Copy
Play List options.
DVD
1 2 3 4
2 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
DVD press ENTER.
15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP 1/3
Recording Time 0h32m55s
Add
Erase HDD 1 2 3 4
DVD to HDD Copy
Move
Play List
Preview
Copy List Total 1h30m 1/2 DVD
Erase All 1 2 3 4
Conf List
DVD
1/3

Title to move Add


HDD 1 2 3 4
Erase
Move
Copy List insertion point Preview
Erase All Copy List Total 1h30m 1/2
Erase all titles ?
Conf List
The thumbnails in the Copy List are updated to reflect the Yes No

new order.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to move other titles in the
Copy List, or press RETURN to go back to the Copy
List menu options.
Using disc back-up*
This feature offers a simple way to make a back-up copy
Preview of a finalized Video mode disc. The data is copied first to
Use this command to check the content of a title in the the hard disk drive, then on to another recordable DVD
Copy List. disc.
1 Select ‘Preview’ from the Copy List menu * See also Copyright on page 62.
options.
1 Press HOME MENU.
2 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select
2 Select ‘Copy’
a title from the Copy List to preview, then press
ENTER. 3 Select ‘Disc Back-up’.
The selected title starts playing. You can return to the
Copy List screen by pressing  STOP, otherwise 4 Select a back-up option.
playback will continue until the end of the Copy List.
Disc Back-up
3 Repeat step 2 to preview other titles, or press
RETURN to go back to the Copy List menu options.
Start new disc back-up

Resume writing data

Erase back-up data

There are three back-up options:


• Start new disc back-up – Start making a back-up of
a disc.
• Resume writing data – Record the back-up data
already on the HDD to a recordable DVD.
• Erase back-up data – Erase the back-up data on the
HDD.

74
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 75 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Copying and back-up 07

5 Press  OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray and • You can cancel the back-up process by pressing ONE
load the disc you want to make a back-up of, then TOUCH COPY for more than one second. However,
close the disc tray. this will make the disc unusable (although if you are
You can only make back-up copies of finalized Video using a DVD-RW disc you can re-initialize it in order
mode discs. to make it usable again—see Initializing a DVD-RW
disc on page 60.)
Disc Back-up

No Disc.
9 After the recorder has finished recording the
Please load a disc to be backed-up. back-up disc, you can select whether to make
another back-up of the same data or exit.
Start Cancel
Disc Back-up

Disc back-up finished.


6 Select ‘Start’. To make another back-up copy, please load
a recordable disc.
Disc Back-up
Start Cancel
Read from disc and save to HDD.
Start reading?
• Select Start to make another back-up copy or Cancel
Start Cancel to finish. If you want to make another back-up copy,
return to step 6 above.
• To see the progress of the back-up, press DISPLAY. 10 If you don’t need to keep the back-up data on
• You can cancel the back-up process by pressing ONE the HDD, you can delete it now.
TOUCH COPY for more than one second. Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to
keep it (you can delete it later if you want to).
7 When the data has been copied, press  OPEN/
CLOSE to open the disc tray. Take out the disc and Disc Back-up
load a blank* recordable DVD. The backed-up data is still on the HDD.
* If you’re using a DVD-RW, the disc doesn’t have to be Erasing it will increase the free space

blank, although the previous contents of the disc will be available. OK to Erase?

erased in the back-up process. Yes No

Disc Back-up
• If you decide to leave the back-up data on the HDD,
Disc content saved to Hard Disk Drive.
you can make back-up copies to recordable DVD
Please eject the disc and load a
recordable disc.
discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu.
Start Cancel

Note
You can use a DVD-R Ver. 2.0 disc, or DVD-RW Ver. 1.1 or • It is not possible to play material on the HDD that has
Ver. 1.2 / 4x for the back-up. been backed-up from DVD.
• If you back-up a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot
undo the finalization later.
• Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may
be cases where the contents of the disc you’re
backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If
this happens, please try another brand of disc.
8 Select ‘Start’ to start writing the backed-up data
to the blank disc.

Disc Back-up

Write back-up data from Hard Disk Drive.


The disc contents will be overwritten.
OK to start?

Start Cancel

• To see the progress of the back-up, press DISPLAY.

75
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 76 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

08 Editing

Chapter 8
Editing
Using the Disc Navigator you can edit video content on unfinalized Video mode and VR mode DVD discs, as well as
video content on the internal hard disk drive (HDD). The editing features available in the Disc Navigator depend on
whether you are editing video on a Video mode or VR mode DVD, or the HDD, and whether you’re editing Original
content, or a Play List.
With unfinalized Video mode DVDs, there are a limited number of editing commands, including naming, locking and
erasing titles. Once a Video mode disc has been finalized, further editing is not possible.
There are two ways to edit VR mode DVD-RW discs. You can directly edit the Original content of the disc, or you can
create and edit a Play List. The Play List doesn’t actually change any of the content on the disc, but just controls how
the content is played back (rather like the program play feature found on CD players).
Editing material recorded on the HDD is similar to editing the Original content of a VR mode DVD-RW, with similar
commands for erasing, naming and locking titles, as well as fine control over the content of chapters within titles.

The Disc Navigator screen


DVD Disc Navigator

Edit mode
Currently selected title

Disc Navigator
Video Mode
DVD 1 2 3
Disc recording
mode Locked title
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP DVD Remain indicator
Disc Navigator Play Recording Time 0h30m40s 0h37m(FINE)
menu options Erase 4 5 6 Recording time
Ttl Name available in the displayed
Lock recording mode
Erase All
Undo 1/1 Number of title
pages

Information for
selected title

76
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 77 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Editing 08

HDD Disc Navigator

Currently selected title HDD group tabs

Disc Navigator
All Group1 Group2 Group3 Group4
HDD 1 2 3 NEW New indicator

Selected Group All 12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP HDD Remain


Recording time
Disc Navigator Play Recording Time 0h30m40s 6h12m(FINE) available in the displayed
menu options Erase 4 5 6 recording mode
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit Locked title
Erase Sec indicator
1/1 Number of title
pages

Information for Auto Replace


selected title Recording indicator

Important
• Titles that have been recorded with a Line Input ONE TOUCH
COPY
setting different to the current setting of the recorder
are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank
HDD DVD
thumbnail image. See also Input Line System on
page 98.
• During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator
for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a
mark. These titles were recorded with a Line Input
setting different to the current setting of the recorder.
CLEAR
During recording, these titles cannot be played. DISC NAVIGATOR PLAY LIST

ENTER
HOME
MENU RETURN

PLAY

PREV NEXT

DISPLAY

DVD RECORDER

77
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 78 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

08 Editing

1 Press HDD or DVD to select the hard disk drive or • You can switch between the HDD and the DVD Disc
the DVD. Navigator screens using the HDD and DVD buttons
(front panel or remote).
2 Press DISC NAVIGATOR to display the Disc
Navigator screen. You can copy a selected HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to
Playback will automatically stop when you do this. HDD by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY (see also page 62
for more on One Touch Copy).
Disc Navigator When editing HDD content, a row of group names
Original appears above the title thumbnails (see Editing HDD
DVD 1 2 3 groups on page 84 for more details). You can access
these by pressing  (cursor up) repeatedly until the All
DVD Remain group is highlighted, then using the / (cursor left/
0h37m(FINE)
Play
Erase 4 5 6
right) buttons to select a group. Press ENTER to ‘open’
Ttl Name the highlighted group.
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec
Titles on the HDD marked with a icon are timer
Undo 1/1
recordings set to Auto Replace Recording (see Standard
timer recording on page 51).
• You can also access the Disc Navigator from the Titles on the HDD marked with a icon are recently
Home Menu (press HOME MENU, select Disc recorded titles that haven’t yet been played.
Navigator then press ENTER).
• Use the / (cursor up/down) buttons to highlight 3 To exit the Disc Navigator, press HOME MENU.
the command you want from the menu options on
the left, then press ENTER. Most commands require Remember
you then to select a title (or chapter) or location from
• You can change the thumbnail pictures used for titles
the thumbnail views area of the screen. Use the /
using the NAVI MARK button—see Changing the
// (cursor buttons) followed by ENTER to do
thumbnail picture for a title on page 37.
this.
• When in the thumbnails area of the screen, use the
PREV () and NEXT () buttons to display the
previous/next page if there are more than six titles/
nine chapters. Disc Navigator menu options
• As you highlight different thumbnails, information The commands available from the Disc Navigator for the
about the title is shown in the central area of the VR mode and Video mode discs and the HDD are shown
screen. Press DISPLAY to change the information below.
displayed.
• If you are editing a VR mode disc, press PLAYLIST to Video mode
switch between Original and Play List Disc Navigator • Play – Play a title (page 79)
screens.
• Title Name (Ttl Name) – Name or rename a title
Playlist / Original indicator (page 80)
• Lock/Unlock – Lock or unlock a title to prevent
Disc Navigator accidental changes being made (page 82)
Play List
DVD 1 2 3
• Erase – Erase a title (page 79)
• Erase All – Erase all titles (page 83)
DVD Remain • Undo – Undo the last change (page 83)
Play 0h37m(FINE)
Erase 4 5 6
Ttl Name
Chpt Edit
VR mode (Original)
Erase Sec
Undo 1/1
• Play – Play a title (page 79)
• Title Name (Ttl Name) – Name or rename a title
(page 80)
• Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on
• Lock/Unlock – Lock or unlock a title to prevent
the left from the thumbnail area of the Disc
accidental changes being made (page 82)
Navigator.
• Erase – Erase a title (page 79)
• Erase All – Erase all titles (page 83)
78
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 79 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Editing 08

• Undo – Undo the last change (page 83)


• Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) – Make detailed changes to Editing VR mode Original, Video
chapters in a title (page 81)
mode and HDD content
• Erase Section (Erase Sec) – Erase a part of a title These commands affect the actual content stored on the
(page 82) DVD-R/RW or HDD.

HDD
Remember
• Play – Play a title (page 79)
• If you are editing a VR mode disc, use the PLAYLIST
• Title Name (Ttl Name) – Name or rename a title button to switch to the Disc Navigator Original
(page 80) screen.
• Lock/Unlock – Lock or unlock a title to prevent
accidental changes being made (page 82)
Play
• Erase – Erase a title (page 79)
VR mode Video mode HDD
• Erase All – Erase all titles (page 83)
• Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) – Make detailed changes Use this function to start playback of a title.
to chapters in a title (page 81) 1 Select ‘Play’ from the Disc Navigator menu
• Divide – Divide a title into two (page 83) options.
• Change Group (Chg Group) – Assign a title to a 2 Use the /// (cursor buttons) to select the
group on the HDD (page 84) title you want to play, then press ENTER or  PLAY.
• Group Name (Grp Name) – Name or rename an
HDD group (page 84) Disc Navigator
Video Mode
• Erase Section (Erase Sec) – Erase part of a title DVD 1 2 3
(page 82)

12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP DVD Remain


VR mode (Play List) Play 0h37m(FINE)
Erase 4 5 6
• Create – Make a new Play List title (page 87) Ttl Name
Lock
• Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) – Make detailed changes to Erase All
Undo
chapters in a Play List title (page 86) 1/1

• Move – Move the position of a title in the Play List


(page 87) Playback of the title you selected starts.
• Erase All – Erase all titles in the Play List (page 88)
• Undo – Undo the last change (page 88) Erase
• Play – Play a title (page 85) VR mode Video mode HDD
• Erase – Erase a title from the Play List (page 85)
The Erase title command does slightly different things
• Title Name (Ttl Name) – Name or rename a title in depending on what you are currently editing. If you are
the Play List (page 85) editing Original content on a VR mode disc or content on
• Combine – Combine two Play List titles into one the HDD, the title will be erased from the disc and the
(page 88) available recording time will increase accordingly.
• Divide – Divide a Play List title into two (page 88) If you erase titles from a Video mode DVD-R disc, the title
• Erase Section (Erase Sec) – Erase a part of a title will disappear from the list of titles, but the available
(page 86) recording time will not increase. Erasing a title from a
Video mode DVD-RW disc increases the available
recording time only if it is the last title on the disc.

79
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 80 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

08 Editing

1 Select ‘Erase’ from the Disc Navigator menu • A name generated automatically by the recorder will
options. already be in the name input section of the screen.
Use the / buttons to change the cursor
2 Use the /// (cursor buttons) to select the
position.
title you want to erase, then press ENTER.
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (/
Disc Navigator
Original ).
DVD 1 2 3
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete
characters directly (press and hold for two seconds
12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP DVD Remain to delete the whole name). For other remote control
0h37m(FINE)
Play
4
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to
Erase
Ttl Name input a name below.
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec • For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
Undo Erase Title?
Yes No 1/1 will see only a limited character set.
4 Highlight ‘OK’ then press ENTER to enter the
3 Highlight ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then name and return to the main Disc Navigator screen.
press ENTER. • To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without
4 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator saving changes to the title name, press RETURN.
menu options, or select another title to erase. 5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another title to name.

Tip
Using the remote key shortcuts to input a name
• You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when The table below shows the remote control key shortcuts
the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing that you can use to input characters in the name input
ENTER. (You can also use this method to erase titles screen. Pressing a button repeatedly cycles through the
when using the Play function, above.) characters shown.
If you want to enter two characters in succession that are
Title Name (Ttl Name) both on the same button (for example a P and an R),
press to advance the cursor one space manually
VR mode Video mode HDD
between inputting the two characters.
You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long
for VR mode and HDD recordings and 32 characters for Key Characters Key Characters
Video mode recordings. 1 .,’?!–&1 6 mno6öôòóøñ
1 Select ‘Ttl Name’ from the Disc Navigator menu 2 abc2äàáâã 7 pqrs7$
options. æç ÿ/ß *1
2 Use the /// (cursor buttons) to select the
3 def3èéëê 8 tuv8üùûú
title you want to name, then press ENTER to go to
the name input screen. 4 ghi4îïìí¡ 9 wxyz9
3 Input a name for the selected title. 5 jkl5£ 0 0

Input Title Name [cursor back] [cursor forward]


12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP
/ [change case] CLEAR [clear character]
ABC DE F GH I J KLM . , ? !
CAPS
small
N O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z ( ) : ; 
AA A A A AÆ ç E E E E I I I I #
DN O OOO O ø UUUUY ß$%
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ &  <space>  [finish name input]
+ – /@ [ ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ± { _| } ~ ¡
c £ \ § ¨ © a– << ¬ – ® ˚
2 3
´ µ¶ · ¸ 1 –o 1/4
<<
/2 /4 ¿ `
1 3 VIDEO ~ ()_/:;”`^@#∗%¥|+=
OK Clear Space Plus+ {}[]<>

*1
lower-case: ÿ; upper-case: ß
• Use the /// (cursor buttons) and ENTER to
select characters.

80
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 81 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Editing 08

Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) • Preview – Preview chapters: Select the chapter you
want to play; press  STOP to return to the chapter
VR mode HDD
edit screen.
When editing VR mode DVDs or video on the HDD you • Undo – Undo the last command (only works with VR
can edit individual chapters within a title, with mode disc edits).
commands for erasing, combining and dividing. You can
also play individual chapters to check their content. 3 Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on
the left side of the screen.
1 Select ‘Chpt Edit’ from the Disc Navigator menu
options. 4 To return to the Disc Navigator screen, press
RETURN again, or select ‘Back’ from the menu
2 Use the /// (cursor buttons) to select the options on the left.
title that contains the chapters you want to edit,
then press ENTER.
Note
Chapter Edit • When editing VR mode Original content, it may not
Original
DVD
be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds
Title 15:00 Wed 7/10 Pr 5 LP Chapter
1 0h03m long.
1 2 3
• It may not always be possible to combine two
Erase
4 5 6 chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter
Divide has been divided into three, then the middle chapter
Combine 7 8 9
Preview erased, it is not possible to combine the two
Undo remaining chapters into one.
Back 1/1

Inserting chapter markers into a title


After selecting a title, thumbnails of each chapter appear
and you’ll see that the Disc Navigator menu items VR mode HDD
change to the chapter editing commands: You can create new chapters within a title using the CHP
• Erase – Erase chapters: Select the chapter you want MARK button while playing the title or during recording.
to erase and press ENTER (see also the note below). This is useful not just for navigation of the disc content
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts: but also for editing purposes.
Select the chapter you want to divide. From the
following screen use the playback controls (, ,
, , etc.) to find the point at which you want to
divide the chapter. With Divide highlighted, press PAUSE

ENTER.

Divide Chapter
Original CHP
MARK
DVD Title 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP Chapter
1 Recording Time 0h01m24s 0h00m
1-3 0.00.52.17
 Play Pause

Divide 1 Start playback of the title you want to create


Divide
new chapter markers in.
Back
You can use the Play command from the Disc Navigator
menu to do this.
2 Press CHP MARK at any point where you want a
You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as new chapter to begin.
you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD disc or 99 A chapter marker icon appears on-screen briefly to
chapters per HDD title). Highlight Back and press confirm a new chapter mark has been inserted:
ENTER to return to the Chapter Edit screen.
• Combine – Combine two adjacent chapters into one:
Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent
chapters and press ENTER (see also the note below)

81
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 82 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

08 Editing

• For greater control over the exact position of chapter 3 Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to
markers it can be useful to use the  PAUSE button find the start of the section to erase, then (with
and/or the slow-motion and frame advance/reverse ‘From’ highlighted) press ENTER.
controls ( / ). The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current
play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker
appears under the bar to show the start of the section.
Note
• You cannot insert chapter markers during Auto Start
Recording.  Play Pause
• If you pause a recording in VR mode, the recorder A B
automatically starts a new chapter when you restart From T
the recording. 0.02.09.17
• When recording in Video mode, the recorder A
automatically puts chapter markers in at regular
intervals. It is not possible to add extra chapter
4 In the same way, find the end of the section to
markers manually after recording (see also Auto
erase, then (with ‘To’ highlighted) press ENTER.
Chapter (Video) on page 108).
After pressing ENTER, another marker appears under the
• The Play List and Original content on a disc can each bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself
contain up to 999 chapters. marked in red.
• Each HDD title can contain a maximum of 99
5 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
chapters.
press ENTER.
• Similar chapter editing commands are available for In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of
HDD content from the HDD to DVD copy screen. See video either side of the marked section to see how the
also Copying from HDD to DVD* on page 63. edit will look.
• When editing VR mode Original content, you may not
Erase Section (Erase Sec) be able to erase very short sections (less than five
seconds).
VR mode HDD
6 Erase another section from the same title, or
Using this command you can delete a part of an Original
press RETURN to get back to the main Disc Navigator
title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a
screen.
recording made from the TV.
1 Select ‘Erase Sec’ from the Disc Navigator menu Lock / Unlock
options.
VR mode Video mode HDD
2 Use the /// (cursor buttons) to select a
title. You can lock a title so that it can’t be edited or erased
After selecting a title, the Erase Sec screen appears from accidently. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock
which you can mark the start and end points of the it later.
section to erase.
Important
Erase Sec
Original • You can’t undo any edits made before changing the
DVD 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP
Title 1 Recording Time 0h01m24s lock status. You also can’t undo a lock/unlock
1-1 0.00.52.17 command using the Undo option from the Disc
 Play Pause
Navigator menu.
Erase Sec A B
From To
Back

82
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 83 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Editing 08

1 Select ‘Lock’ from the Disc Navigator menu Undo


options.
VR mode Video mode
2 Use the /// (cursor buttons) to select the
If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally
title you want to lock (or unlock), then press ENTER.
undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words,
you can undo the last three edits you made).
Disc Navigator
Original • Select ‘Undo’ from the Disc Navigator menu
DVD 1 2 3
options.
• You can’t undo anything after ejecting the disc from
12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP DVD Remain the recorder or switching the recorder into standby.
Lock 0h37m(FINE)
Erase All 4 • You can’t undo the following operations: initializing,
recording or finalizing a disc, locking and unlocking
titles.
Undo 1/1

Divide
An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be
HDD
unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator
with a padlock icon. Use this command to divide a title on the HDD into two.
3 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator Note that once divided, the two new titles cannot be
menu options, or select another title to lock/unlock. recombined into one again.
1 Select ‘Divide’ from the Disc Navigator menu
Erase All options.
VR mode Video mode HDD 2 Select the title that you want to divide, then
press ENTER.
This erases all unlocked titles from the disc (see also Lock
/ Unlock on page 82).
Divide Title

1 Select ‘Erase All’ from the Disc Navigator menu HDD 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP
Title 2
options. Recording Time 0h01m24s
2-1 0.00.08.26
 Play Pause
2 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER. Divide
Divide
Back
Disc Navigator
Original
DVD 1 2 3

DVD Remain
3 Use the standard playback controls to find the
Lock 0h37m(FINE) place you want to divide the title.
Erase All 4

4 With ‘Divide’ highlighted, press ENTER to divide


Erase all titles?
the title at the current playback position.
Undo Yes No 1/1
5 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm you want to divide the
title.
Select No if you want to cancel and leave the title intact.
6 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another title to divide.

83
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 84 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

08 Editing

Group Name (Grp Name)


Editing HDD groups HDD
HDD Use this command to rename a group.
The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be 1 Select ‘Grp Name’ from the Disc Navigator menu.
many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize
your HDD video content there are four ‘groups’. You can 2 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select
move content from group to group, and rename the the group that you want to name or rename, then
groups as you want. press ENTER.

Input Group Name


Change Group (Chg Group) Group 1
HDD ABC DE F GH I J KLM . , ? !
CAPS
N O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z ( ) : ;
small
AA A A A AÆ ç E E E E I I I I #
Use this command to assign titles to a particular group. DN O OOO O ø UUUUY ß$%
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ &
+ – /@ [ ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ± { _| } ~ ¡
1 Select ‘Chg Group’ from the Disc Navigator c £ \ § ¨ © a– << ¬ – ® ˚
´ µ¶ · ¸ 1 –o 1/4 /2 /4 ¿ `
2 3 << 1 3

menu, then press ENTER. OK Clear Space

2 Select the title that you want to put into a


different group, then press ENTER.
3 Input a name for the group.
3 Use the / (cursor up/down) buttons to select
The name can be up to six characters long.
a group for the title, then press ENTER.
• You can select one of the four groups, or choose No 4 To finish entering the name, highlight ‘Exit’ and
Group, in which case it will only appear when All is press ENTER.
selected.
5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another group to name.
Disc Navigator

HDD
Title 1 21:00 Fri 6/09 Pr 5 LP

No Group
All
Lock
GROUP1 Creating and editing a VR mode Play
GROUP2
Erase All
Grp Name
GROUP3 List
Chg Group GROUP4
Divide VR mode

A Play List is a kind of virtual content based on the actual


(Original) content of the disc. The main advantages of
4 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator this type of editing is that it is non-destructive of the video
menu options, or select another title to change the content on the disc, and it allows greater control over
group of. editing, so that you end up with the content exactly as you
want it.

Remember
• Use the PLAYLIST button to switch to the Play List
edit screen.
• The Play List can contain a maximum of 99 titles.

84
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 85 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Editing 08

Play Title Name (Ttl Name)


VR mode VR mode

Use this function to start playback of a title. You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters
long.
1 Select ‘Play’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
menu options. 1 Select ‘Ttl Name’ from the Disc Navigator Play
List menu options.
2 Select the title you want to play, then press
ENTER. 2 Select the title you want to name, then press
ENTER.
Disc Navigator
Play List
3 Input a name for the selected title.
DVD 1 2 3
Input Title Name

12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP


12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE) ABC DE F GH I J KLM . , ? !
Play CAPS
N O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z ( ) : ;
Erase 4 small
AA A A A AÆ ç E E E E I I I I #
Ttl Name DN O OOO O ø UUUUY ß$%
Chpt Edit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ &
Erase Sec + – /@ [ ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ± { _| } ~ ¡
Undo 1/1 c £ \ § ¨ © a– << ¬ – ® ˚
´ µ¶ · ¸ 1 –o 1/4 /2 /4 ¿ `
2 3 << 1 3

OK Clear Space

Playback of the title you selected starts.

Press ENTER after selecting each character.


Erase
• A name generated automatically by the recorder will
VR mode already be in the name input section of the screen.
This command erases a title only from the Play List. The Use the / buttons to change the cursor
title remains in the Original content and the available position.
recording time does not increase. • Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (/
1 Select ‘Erase’ from the Disc Navigator Play List ).
menu options.
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete
2 Select the title you want to erase, then press characters directly (press and hold for two seconds
ENTER. to delete the whole name). For other remote control
key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to
Disc Navigator input a name on page 80.
Play List
DVD 1 2 3
• For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
will see only a limited character set.

12:30 Wed 4/11 Pr 5 LP DVD Remain


4 Highlight ‘OK’, then press ENTER to fix the name
Play
4
0h37m(FINE) and return to the main Disc Navigator screen.
Erase
Ttl Name • To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without
Chpt Edit
Erase Sec
saving changes to the title name, press RETURN.
Erase Title?
Undo 1/1
Yes No 5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another title to name.
3 Highlight ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
4 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
menu options, or select another title to erase.

Note
• The remaining recording time doesn’t change when
you erase something from the Play List.

85
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 86 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

08 Editing

Chapter Edit (Chpt Edit) • Preview – Preview chapters: Select the chapter you
want to play; press  STOP to return to the chapter
VR mode
edit screen.
When editing VR mode DVDs you can edit individual • Undo – Undo the last command.
chapters within a title, with commands for erasing,
moving, combining and dividing. You can also play 3 Press RETURN to get back to the menu options on
individual chapters to check their content. the left side of the screen.

1 Select ‘Chpt Edit’ from the Disc Navigator Play 4 To return to the Disc Navigator screen, press
List menu options. RETURN again, or select ‘Back’ from the menu
options on the left.
2 Select the title that contains the chapters you
want to edit, then press ENTER.
After selecting a title, thumbnails of each chapter appear Erase Section (Erase Sec)
and you’ll see that the Disc Navigator menu items VR mode
change to the chapter editing commands:
Using this command you can delete a part of a Play List
title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a
Chapter Edit
Play List recording made from the TV.
DVD Title 15:00 Wed11/12 Pr 5 LP Chapter
1 0h03m 1 Select ‘Erase Sec’ from the Disc Navigator menu
1 2 3
options.
Erase
4 5 6
2 Use the /// (cursor buttons) to select a
Divide
Combine 7 8 9
title.
Move
Undo
After selecting a title, the Erase Sec screen appears from
Back 1/1 which you can mark the start and end points of the
section to erase.

• Erase – Erase chapters: Select the chapter you want Erase Sec
to erase and press ENTER. Play List
DVD 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP
• Divide – Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Title 1 Recording Time 0h01m24s

Select the chapter you want to divide. From the 1-2


 Play Pause
0.00.52.17

following screen use the playback controls (, ,


Erase Sec A B
, , etc.) to find the point at which you want to From To
divide the chapter. With Divide highlighted, press Back
ENTER.
Divide Chapter
Play List
DVD Title 15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP Chapter
1 Recording Time 0h01m24s 0h00m 3 Use the playback controls (, , , , etc.) to
1-3
 Play Pause
0.00.52.17 find the start of the section to erase, then (with
‘From’ highlighted) press ENTER.
Divide
Divide
The bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current
Back play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker
appears under the bar to show the start of the section.

 Play Pause
You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as A B
you want (up to 999 chapters per disc). Highlight From T
Back and press ENTER to return to the Chapter Edit 0.02.09.17
screen.
A
• Combine – Combine two adjacent chapters into one:
Select the dividing line between two adjacent
4 In the same way, find the end of the section to
chapters and press ENTER.
erase, then (with ‘To’ highlighted) press ENTER.
• Move – Rearrange chapters: Select the chapter you After pressing ENTER, another marker appears under the
want to move, press ENTER, then highlight the new bar to show the end of the section, with the section itself
location for it, then press ENTER again. marked in red.
86
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 87 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Editing 08

5 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then 4 Press ENTER to add the title.
press ENTER. The new title appears in the updated Play List.
In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of
video either side of the marked section to see how the Disc Navigator
edit will look. Play List
DVD 1 2 3
6 Erase another section from the same title, or
press RETURN to get back to the main Disc Navigator
DVD Remain
screen. Create 0h37m(FINE)
Move
Divide
Combine
Create Erase All
Undo 1/1
VR mode

Use this function to add an Original title to the Play List.


When you do this, the whole title is put into the Play List 5 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
(you can erase bits you don’t need later—see Chapter Edit menu options, or select another location for a new
(Chpt Edit) on page 86). title.
The title appears in the Play List complete with the
chapter markers that appear in the Original. However, if Move
you add more chapter markers to the Original later, these VR mode
are not automatically copied over into the Play List title.
Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play
You can add up to 99 titles to the Play List.
List titles.
1 Select ‘Create’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
1 Select ‘Move’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
menu options.
menu options.
2 Use the /// (cursor buttons) to select the
2 Select the title you want to move, then press
insertion point for the new title, then press ENTER.
ENTER.
Disc Navigator
Play List Disc Navigator
DVD 1 2 Play List
DVD 1 2 3

DVD Remain
Create 0h37m(FINE) 12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP DVD Remain
Move Create 0h37m(FINE)
Divide Move 4
Combine Divide
Erase All Combine
Undo 1/1 Erase All
Undo 1/1

If there are no titles in the Play List yet, this step does not
3 Select a new position in the Play List for the title,
apply.
then press ENTER.
3 Use the /// (cursor buttons) to select an
Original title to put into the Play List. Disc Navigator
Play List
DVD 1 2 3
Disc Navigator
Play List
DVD ORG1 ORG2 ORG3
DVD Remain
Create 0h37m(FINE)
Move 4
12:30 Wed15/11 Pr 5 LP DVD Remain Divide
Create 0h37m(FINE) Combine
Move ORG4 Erase All
Divide Undo 1/1
Combine
Erase All
Undo 1/1
After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is
displayed.

87
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 88 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

08 Editing

4 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is
menu options, or select another title to move. displayed.

Divide Disc Navigator


Play List
DVD 1 2 3
VR mode

Use this command to split a title up into two new titles.


DVD Remain
0h37m(FINE)
1 Select ‘Divide’ from the Disc Navigator Play List Create
Move
menu options. Divide
Combine
Erase All
2 Select the title that you want to divide, then Undo 1/1
press ENTER.
3 Use the playback controls to find the place you
3 Press RETURN to go back to the Disc Navigator
want to divide the title.
menu options, or continue combining more titles.
Divide Chapter
Play List
DVD
Title 1
15:00 Wed 13/12 Pr 5 LP Erase All
Recording Time 0h01m24s
1-1 0.00.08.26 VR mode
 Play Pause

Divide
This command erases all the titles from the Play List.
Divide
Back 1 Select ‘Erase All’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
menu options.
2 Select ‘Yes’ to confirm, or ‘No’ to cancel, then
press ENTER.
You can use all the usual playback controls, including
 PLAY,  PAUSE, scan ( , ), and slow-motion Disc Navigator
Play List
( , ). DVD 1 2 3

4 With ‘Divide’ highlighted, press ENTER to divide


the title at the current playback position. DVD Remain
Create 0h37m(FINE)
4
5 To return to the Disc Navigator menu options, Move
Divide
select ‘Back’ and press ENTER. Combine
Erase All
Erase all titles?
Undo Yes No 1/1

Combine
VR mode
Undo
Use this function to combine two adjacent Play List titles
into one. VR mode

1 Select ‘Combine’ from the Disc Navigator Play If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally
List menu options. undo it. There are three levels of undo (in other words,
you can undo the last three edits you made).
2 Highlight the bar divider between the two titles
you want to combine, then press ENTER. • Select ‘Undo’ from the Disc Navigator Play List
menu options.
Disc Navigator
• You can’t undo anything after ejecting the disc from
Play List the recorder or switching the recorder into standby.
DVD 1 2 3
• You can’t undo the following operations: initializing,
recording or finalizing a disc, locking and unlocking
DVD Remain titles.
Create 0h37m(FINE)
Move 4
Divide
Combine
Erase All
Undo 1/1

88
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 89 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Disc History 09

Chapter 9
Disc History
VR mode Video mode

The Disc History screen lets you see how much recording space remains on the last 30 recordable DVD discs loaded.
It also displays information such as disc name, the first three title names, number of titles recorded, recording mode
and the lock status of the disc.

Available
Disc name recording space

Disc History
1/2
Disc Name DVD Remain LP Recording mode
Disc loaded News 1h54m
Selected disc Sport 2h35m
Travel 1h22m Recording time
Other discs Movie 0h30m available
Music 1h38m

Title information Number of


Title 1 Today's Football Titles : 8
for the selected Title 2 Enjoy Golf! DVD-RW VR
titles on disc
disc Title 3 Social dance Lesson 625System
Disc type and
recording mode

Recorded Line Disc lock indicator


System of disc

3 To exit the Disc History screen, press HOME


Using the Disc History MENU or DISC HISTORY.

1 Press DISC HISTORY to display the Disc History


screen. Note
The most recently loaded disc appears at the top of the • When you initialize a DVD-RW disc or record a
list, with previously loaded discs below it. If there is a disc DVD-R disc for the first time, the recorder
loaded, it is shown in the list with a ‘disc in’ icon. automatically names the disc DISC ** (where ** is a
• The Disc History screen is also accessible from the number from 1 to 99). You can rename the disc if you
Home Menu. want to (see Input Disc Name on page 92).
• When you change the display for the available
2 Use the / (cursor up/down) buttons to see recording time using the REC MODE button, only the
title information for other discs in the list. display is changed; the actual recording mode is not
• To remove a disc from the list, press CLEAR (you affected.
can’t remove the currently loaded disc).
• The following discs appear in the Disc History list in
• You can see the available recording time for different gray:
recording modes by pressing the REC MODE button. – Discs with no available recording space left
– Locked discs
– Discs that contain the maximum 99 titles and/or
999 chapters
– Discs recorded with a Line Input setting different to
the recorder’s current setting.
• When a Video mode disc is finalized, the information
for that disc disappears from the Disc History.

89
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 90 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

10 The PhotoViewer

Chapter 10
The PhotoViewer
From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on a CD-ROM/R/RW on your TV.

Currently selected thumbnail

PhotoViewer
File Chair No. 2
Date/Time 10:00 12/05/2003 Size 1920 x 1440 File information
01. 12/12 TUE 1 2 3
Currently selected
02. 13/12 WED
folder in folder list
03. 14/12 THU
4 5 6
04. 15/12 FRI
05. 16/12 SAT
06. 17/12 SUN 7 8 9
07. 18/12 MON
08. 19/12 TUE
Pages in Pages in file
1/2 1/3
folder list view

Note
Playing a slideshow
• Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there
1 Press HOME MENU and select ‘PhotoViewer’ to are more files/folders than this on the disc it is still
display the PhotoViewer screen. possible to view them all using the Reload function
• The PhotoViewer is only accessible when a disc (see below).
containing JPEG files is loaded. • The time it takes for the recorder to load a file
2 Use the / (cursor up/down) buttons to select increases with large file sizes.
a folder from the folder list. • Pictures with an aspect ratio different to your TV
The first nine images from the selected folder are screen will appear with black bars top and bottom, or
displayed as thumbnails in the main part of the screen. either side (depending on the picture).
3 Press ENTER to move to the thumbnail view area. • If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that
The first thumbnail image is highlighted. the disc and file formats are compatible with this
recorder (see JPEG file compatibility on page 10).
• To get back to the folder list, press RETURN.
4 Use the /// (cursor buttons) to select a Reloading files from a disc
thumbnail. If you have a disc with a large number of files and/or
• Use the  and  buttons to display the previous/ folders, you can still view all the images using the reload
next page of thumbnails. function.
5 Press ENTER or  PLAY to start playing a 1 Use the  (cursor down) button to navigate to
slideshow from the selected thumbnail. the last entry in the folder list (‘Read next: ...’).
• Use the  PREV / NEXT  buttons to display the
previous/next picture, or the  PAUSE button to 2 Press ENTER to load the next batch of up to 999
pause the slideshow. files/99 folders from the disc.
It will take a moment (at most a minute) to load in the
6 Press  STOP or RETURN to return to the images.
thumbnail view area.
7 To return to the folder view area, press RETURN.
• To exit the PhotoViewer, press HOME MENU.

90
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 91 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

The PhotoViewer 10

Note
• You can press HOME MENU to exit the PhotoViewer
screen while the recorder is reloading images. (If you
enter the PhotoViewer again, it will resume
reloading.)

Zooming the screen


During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion
of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move
the area of the picture displayed.
1 During a slideshow, use the CHANNEL + button
to zoom the picture.
2x Zoom

Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and


4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen.
2 Use the /// (cursor buttons) to move the
zoomed area within the picture.

Rotating the screen


You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow
so you can always view pictures the right way up,
whichever way they were taken.
• During a slideshow, press ANGLE to rotate the
displayed picture clockwise by 90º.
Press ANGLE repeatedly to continue rotating the picture
in increments of 90º.

91
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 92 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

11 The Disc Setup menu

Chapter 11
The Disc Setup menu
From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the 2 Input a name for the disc up to 64 characters long
contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure, for a VR mode disc, or 32 for a Video mode disc.
initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is
accessed from the Home menu: Input Disc Name

DISC7
• Press HOME MENU and select ‘Disc Setup’. ABC DE F GH I J KLM . , ? !
CAPS
N O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z ( ) : ;
small
AA A A A AÆ ç E E E E I I I I #
DN O OOO O ø UUUUY ß$%
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < = > _ &
+ – /@ [ ¥ ] ˆ ÷ x ± { _| } ~ ¡
c £ \ § ¨ © a– << ¬ – ® ˚
´ µ¶ · ¸ 1 –o 1/4 /2 /4 ¿
<<
Timer Recording Disc Setup
2 3 1 3
`
OK Clear Space
Disc Navigator Initial Setup

Copy Video/Audio Adjust

Disc History Play Mode

PhotoViewer DV Record • Use the /// (cursor buttons) and ENTER to


select characters.
DVR-520H/720H Screen
• Use the / buttons to change the cursor
position.
• Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-
case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (/
Basic settings ).
• You can also use the CLEAR button to delete
Input Disc Name characters directly (press and hold for two seconds
to delete the whole name). For other remote control
VR mode Video mode key shortcuts, see Using the remote key shortcuts to
When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder input a name on page 80.
automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from • For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you
DISC 1 to DISC 99. You can use the Input Disc Name will see only a limited character set.
function to change the default disc name to something
more descriptive. This name appears when you load the
Note
disc and when you display disc information on-screen.
• You cannot input a name for a disc if the TV line
1 Select ‘Input Disc Name’ from the Basic options, system of the disc is different to the current setting of
then ‘Next Screen’. the recorder. See Input Line System on page 98 for
how to change the recorder’s setting.
Disc Setup

Basic Input Disc Name Next Screen


Initialize Lock Disc Lock Disc
Finalize
VR mode

• Default setting: Off

Disc Setup

Basic Input Disc Name On


Initialize Lock Disc Off
Finalize

Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or


erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc
to make edits, select Off.

92
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 93 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

The Disc Setup menu 11

Important
Finalize settings
• A locked disc can still be initialized (which will
completely erase the disc).
Finalize
Note DVD-R DVD-RW

• You cannot change the lock setting for a disc if the TV Finalizing ‘fixes’ the recordings in place so that the disc
line system of the disc is different to the current can be played on a regular DVD player or computer
setting of the recorder. See Input Line System on equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.
page 98 for how to change the recorder’s setting. See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on
page 59 for detailed instructions.

Undo Finalize
Initialize settings
DVD-RW
DVD-RW
You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded
You can initialize a DVD-RW disc for either VR mode on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you
recording or Video mode recording. The first time you want to record more material or edit material already on
load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be automatically the disc.
initialized for recording according to the DVD-RW Auto
You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs
Init. setting in the Initial Setup menu (see page 108).
which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If
The initialize menu here lets you reinitialize a disc, for when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be
example if you want to change the recording format of recorded. Undo the finalization is displayed, use this
the disc. See Initializing a DVD-RW disc on page 60 for command to be able to record on the disc using this
detailed instructions. recorder.
1 From the Disc Setup menu, select ‘Finalize’, then
‘Undo Finalize’ from the finalize options.
HDD Initialize 2 Select ‘Start’.
HDD

When your DVD recorder is working without a problem Note


this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu. • You cannot finalize a disc or use the Undo Finalize
However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for command if the TV line system of the disc is different
some reason, you initialize the HDD to fix the problem. to the current setting of the recorder. See Input Line
Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the data on it. System on page 98 for how to change the recorder’s
• Select ‘Initialize HDD’ from the disc Setup menu. setting.

Disc Setup

Basic Initialize Start


Initialize
Finalize
Initialize HDD

• Select ‘Start’ to initialize.

93
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 94 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

12 The Video/Audio Adjust menu

Chapter 12
The Video/Audio Adjust menu
Using the Video/Audio Adjust menu you can set up the picture quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc
playback, and for recording.

4 Press ENTER to select the preset.


Setting the picture quality for TV and
external inputs Creating your own set
Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality There are three user presets in which you can save your
settings for the built-in TV tuner and for each external own set of picture quality settings.
input. There are several preset settings that suit various 1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of
sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets. the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).
2 Select ‘Detailed Settings’.
Choosing a preset
Pr 5
1 With the recorder stopped, press HOME MENU
Memory1
and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.
Detailed Settings

3 Use the / (cursor up/down) buttons to select


Timer Recording Disc Setup
the picture quality setting you want to adjust.
Disc Navigator Initial Setup
Memory1 Pr 5
Copy Video/Audio Adjust

Disc History Play Mode 3-D Y/C Motion Still

PhotoViewer DV Record VNR Off


Detail Off Max
White AGC Off
DVR-520H/720H screen
White Level Min Max

2 Select ‘Video Adjust’. Black Level Min Max


Black Setup 0 IRE
3 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to
change the preset.
You can adjust the following settings:
Pr 5 • 3-D Y/C – Adjusts the brightness/colour separation
Tuner (NTSC video only).
Detailed Settings • VNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction applied
to the video signal.
• Use the INPUT SELECT button to switch between the • Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
built-in TV tuner and the external inputs. • White AGC – Turn on for automatic white level
• Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons to change the adjustment.
channel of the built-in TV tuner. • White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.
There are six presets available: • Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.
• Tuner – suitable for general TV broadcasts • Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black
• VCR – suitable for video cassettes level (NTSC video only).
• LDP – suitable for Laserdiscs • Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and
• Memory1 – user preset 1 green.
• Memory2 – user preset 2 • Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours
appear.
• Memory3 – user preset 3
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for
the current preset (Tuner, VCR or LDP).

94
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 95 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

The Video/Audio Adjust menu 12

4 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to adjust Creating your own set
the currently selected picture quality setting. There are three user presets in which you can save your
5 When you have all the settings as you want own set of picture quality settings for disc playback.
them, press HOME MENU to exit. 1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of
You can now use the preset for any other input or the the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).
built-in TV tuner.
2 Move the cursor down and select ‘Detailed
Settings’.
Tip
• To see more of the picture as you adjust different
Memory1
settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you
Detailed Settings
want to adjust.

3 Select the picture quality setting you want to


Note adjust.
• DVR-520H/720H only: When the DV input is selected,
only VNR and Detail settings can be adjusted. Memory1

• When White AGC is On, the White Level setting YNR Off Max

can’t be adjusted. CNR Off Max


QNR Off Max
• The 3-D Y/C and Black Setup settings apply only to Detail Off Max
NTSC video input. White Level Min Max
Black Level Min Max
Black Setup 0 IRE

Setting the picture quality for disc You can adjust the following settings:
playback • YNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
This setting determines how the picture will look when applied to the Y (brightness) component.
playing discs. • CNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the C (colour) component.
Choosing a preset • QNR – Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR)
applied to the block noise.
1 With a disc playing (or paused), press HOME
MENU and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’. • Detail – Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
• White Level – Adjusts the intensity of white.
2 Select ‘Video Adjust’
• Black Level – Adjusts the intensity of black.
3 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to • Black Setup – Corrects the standard reference black
change the setting. level (NTSC video only).
• Hue – Adjusts overall balance between red and
green.
TV(CRT)
Detailed Settings • Chroma Level – Adjusts how rich the colours
appear.
There are six presets available: 4 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to adjust
• TV(CRT) – suitable for standard cathode-ray tube TVs the currently selected picture quality setting.
• PDP – suitable for plasma display screens 5 When you have all the settings as you want
• Professional – suitable for professional monitors them, press HOME MENU to exit.
• Memory1 – user preset 1
• Memory2 – user preset 2 Tip
• Memory3 – user preset 3 • To see more of the picture as you adjust different
You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you
the current preset (TV(CRT), PDP or Professional). want to adjust.

4 Press ENTER to select the preset.


95
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 96 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

12 The Video/Audio Adjust menu

Note
• The Black Setup setting applies only when playing
NTSC discs.

Audio DRC
• Default setting: Off
When watching Dolby Digital material at low volume, it’s
easy to lose low level sounds completely—including
some of the dialog. Switching on Audio DRC (Dynamic
Range Control) can help by bringing up the low level
sounds, while controlling high level peaks.
1 During playback or when paused, press HOME
MENU and select ‘Video/Audio Adjust’.
2 Select ‘Audio Adjust’.
3 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to adjust
DRC from ‘Off‘ to ‘Max’.

Audio Adjust

Audio DRC Off Max

Exactly how much difference you can hear between the


settings will depend on the material.

Remember
• Audio DRC is not effective when listening to a disc via
the digital output when Dolby Digital Out is set to
Dolby Digital. In this case adjust the dynamic range
from your AV amplifier/receiver.

96
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 97 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

The Initial Setup menu 13

Chapter 13
The Initial Setup menu
Set ‘Clock Set CH‘ to the channel preset number
Using the Initial Setup menu that broadcasts a clock signal, then move the
cursor down to ‘Start’ and press ENTER.
The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various
recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on.
Initial Setup
• Press HOME MENU and select ‘Initial Setup’. Basic Clock Setting
Auto Clock Setting
Tuner Input Line System
Date
On Screen Display
Video In/Out
Audio In TimeDisplay
Front Panel
Audio Out Power Save
Clock Set CH Pr 1
Language Remote Control Set
Start
Recording Setup Navigator
Timer Recording Disc Setup Playback
Disc Navigator Initial Setup

Copy Video/Audio Adjust If the time could not be set automatically, press
Disc History Play Mode RETURN to go back to the previous screen and select
PhotoViewer DV Record Manual.

DVR-520H/720H screen • Manual clock setting


If no stations in your area are broadcasting time
• Some settings can only be changed when the signals, you can set the clock manually:
recorder is stopped. During playback these settings
Set your time zone.
are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.
You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative
• Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are to GMT.
exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity.
Initial Setup

Basic Clock Setting


Manual Clock Setting 1/2
Tuner Input Line System
Video In/Out On Screen England
TimeDisplay
Basic settings Audio In
Audio Out
Zone
Front Panel Display
Power Save
London

Summer Time Off


Language Remote Control Set
Recording Setup Navigator
Clock Setting Playback

The date (day, month, year) and time must be set before
you can use any of the timer recording features. Move the cursor down and select ‘On’ for
summer time if you are currently on summer
The clock can be set automatically if there is a broadcast time, then press ENTER.
station transmitting clock signals, or manually.
Select Auto to set the clock automatically or Manual to Initial Setup
display the clock setting screen.
Basic Clock Setting
Manual Clock Setting 1/2
Tuner Input Line System
Video In/Out On Screen England
TimeDisplay
Zone London
Initial Setup Audio In Front Panel Display
Audio Out Power Save
On
Basic Clock Setting Auto Language RemoteSummer
ControlTime
Set
Tuner Input Line System Manual Recording Setup Navigator
Video In/Out On Screen Display Playback
Audio In Front Panel Display
Audio Out Power Save
Language Remote Control Set
Recording Setup Navigator
Playback

• Auto clock setting


Some TV channels broadcast time signals together
with the program. This recorder can use these
signals to set the clock automatically.

97
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 98 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

13 The Initial Setup menu

Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then On Screen Display


press ENTER to make all the settings. • Default setting: On

Initial Setup Initial Setup


Basic Manual Clock Setting
Clock Setting 2/2 Basic Clock Setting On
Tuner Input Line System Tuner Input Line System Off
Date THU 01 01 2004
Video In/Out On Screen Display Video In/Out On Screen Display
Audio In Front Panel
Time Display 00 00 Audio In Front Panel Display
Audio Out Power Save Audio Out Power Save
Time Zone England
Language Remote Control Set Language Remote Control Set
London
Recording Setup Navigator Recording Setup Navigator
Playback Summer Time On
Playback

Use the / (cursor up/down) buttons to change On the default setting, the recorder shows on-screen
the value in the highlighted field. operation displays (Play, Stop and so on). Change to Off
Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to move to hide these displays.
from one field to another.
Front Panel Display
Input Line System • Default setting: On
• Default setting: 625System
Initial Setup

Initial Setup Basic Clock Setting On


Tuner Input Line System Off
Basic Clock Setting 525System Video In/Out On Screen Display
Tuner Input Line System 625System Audio In Front Panel Display
Video In/Out On Screen Display Audio Out Power Save
Audio In Front Panel Display Language Remote Control Set
Audio Out Power Save Recording Setup Navigator
Language Remote Control Set Playback
Recording Setup Navigator
Playback

On the default setting, the time is shown in the front


For standard PAL or SECAM recording, leave the input panel display when the recorder is in standby. Switch to
line system to 625System. When recording an NTSC or Off to have the front panel display switch off completely
PAL–60 signal through an external input, change to when in standby.
525System.
Note
Note • When set to Off, the display still lights dimly in
• When the current input is a built-in tuner channel standby when setting a timer recording, or during
preset, changing the input line system will usually Auto Start Recording.
also affect the input line system of the AV2/AUTO
START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) input. However if
Power Save
the AV2/L1 In setting is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1
• Default setting: Off
In on page 102), then the L2 input is affected instead.
• If when this setting is changed, the screen goes
Initial Setup
blank (due to incompatibility with your TV), you can
Basic Clock Setting Mode1
switch back by pressing and holding the front panel Tuner Input Line System Mode2
+ button then pressing DVD (also front panel) while Video In/Out
Audio In
On Screen Display
Front Panel Display
Off

the recorder is stopped. Audio Out Power Save


Language Remote Control Set
• When you switch the Line Input System setting the Recording Setup Navigator
Playback
Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the
+ button and DVD buttons as described above, there
is no confirmation, so please use with care. When set to Off, signals arriving at the ANTENNA IN
terminal and at the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/
• You can’t mix recordings of different TV line systems DECODER) AV connector are passed through to the
on the same disc. ANTENNA OUT terminal and to the AV1(RGB)-TV AV
• When you change this setting, the Input Colour connector, respectively, when the recorder is in standby.
System setting also changes (see Input Colour You can cut the standby power consumption of the
System on page 102). recorder by turning off the through function for one or
both terminals:

98
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 99 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

The Initial Setup menu 13

• Mode1 – Through function only for the antenna


terminal Tuner settings
• Mode2 – No through function
• Off – Through function for both antenna terminal
Auto Channel Setting : Auto Scan
and AV connector
This recorder has a built-in TV tuner for recording PAL B/
G, PAL I, SECAM L and SECAM D/K TV programs off the
Note air or from analog cable TV. We recommend that you first
• When a timer recording is set with VPS/PDC on, use the Auto Channel Setting described here to tune into
SCART through is always active. the channels in your area, then if there are any unwanted
channels, you can disable them using Channel Skip
(described below).
Remote Control Set
1 Choose ‘Tuner’ from the Initial Setup menu, then
• Default setting: Recorder1
‘Auto Channel Setting’, then ‘Auto Scan’.
You only need to set this if you are using more than one
Pioneer DVD recorder in the same room.
Initial Setup

Basic Auto Channel Setting Auto Scan


Initial Setup Tuner Manual CH Setting Download from TV
Video In/Out Channel Swapping
Basic Clock Setting Recorder1 Audio In Set VIDEO Plus+ CH
Tuner Input Line System Recorder2 Audio Out
Video In/Out On Screen Display Recorder3 Language
Audio In Front Panel Display Recording
Audio Out Power Save Playback
Language Remote Control Set
Recording Setup Navigator
Playback
2 Select your country then press ENTER to start
tuning.
So that each remote control operates only its own
recorder, make this setting different for each recorder
Initial Setup
and remote in the room.
Basic Auto Setting
Auto Channel
Auto Channel Channel
Setting Setting
There are three different recorder IDs. When set to Tuner Manual CH Setting
Country UK
Video In/Out Channel Swapping
Recorder2 or Recorder3, the remote control mode is Audio In Set VIDEO Plus+ CH
Audio Out
shown in the front panel display. Language
Recording
After selecting a new recorder ID, you have to confirm the Playback
change by selecting Yes or No (use the / (cursor
left/right) buttons), then pressing ENTER. • You can cancel before auto tuning has finished by
Note that as soon as you change the recorder ID, the pressing ENTER again.
remote becomes inoperative until you change the remote After auto scanning has finished, the channel mapping
to the same ID. screen appears showing which channels have been
To set the remote, press and hold RETURN and a number assigned to which program numbers.
button (1, 2 or 3) until the indicator on the remote lights.
Initial Setup
Setup Navigator Channel Mapping 1/7
• Default setting: n/a Pr System CH Name Pr System CH Name
1 I 26 9 I 9
2 I 33 10 I 25
3 I 23 11 I 11
Initial Setup 4 I 30 12 I 12
5 I 37 13 I 13
Basic Clock Setting Start 6 I 35 14 I 14
Tuner Input Line System 7 I 39 15 I 15
Video In/Out On Screen Display 8 I 26 16 I 16
Audio In Front Panel Display
Audio Out Power Save
Language Remote Control Set
Recording Setup Navigator Use the PREV/NEXT buttons to display the previous/next
Playback page.

The Setup Navigator appears automatically when you 3 Press HOME MENU to exit this screen.
switch on the recorder for the first time (or after resetting
the recorder). It is also available from the Initial Settings
menu should you need it at any other time.
See also Switching on and setting up on page 25.
99
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 100 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

13 The Initial Setup menu

1 Select ‘Manual CH Setting’, then ‘Next Screen’.


Note
• You can fine-tune individual stations using the Initial Setup
Manual CH Setting feature. See Manual CH Setting Basic Auto Channel Setting Next Screen
below for how to use this. Tuner Manual CH Setting
Video In/Out Channel Swapping
Audio In Set VIDEO Plus+ CH
Audio Out
Auto Channel Setting : Download from TV Language
Recording
If you connected this recorder to your TV using the Playback

AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector, and if your TV supports this


function, you can download all the channels that your TV Press ENTER to go to the country setting screen.
is tuned to. Check your TV’s instruction manual for more
details. 2 Select your country.

1 Choose ‘Download from TV’. Initial Setup

Basic Manual
Auto Channel Channel Setting
Setting
Initial Setup Tuner CH Setting
Manual Channel Setting
Country UK
Video In/Out Channel Swapping
Basic Auto Channel Setting Auto Scan Audio In Set VIDEO Plus+ CH
Tuner Manual CH Setting Download from TV Audio Out
Video In/Out Channel Swapping Language
Audio In Set VIDEO Plus+ CH Recording
Audio Out Playback
Language
Recording
Playback 3 Press ENTER to go to the manual channel setting
screen.
2 Select your country.
Pr 1
Skip Off
Initial Setup
CH System UK & IE
Basic Auto Setting
Auto Channel
Auto Channel Channel
Setting Setting Channel 2
Tuner Manual CH Setting AFT On
Country UK
Video In/Out Channel Swapping Level
Audio In Set VIDEO Plus+ CH Sound System I
Audio Out Name
Language
Decoder Off
Recording
Playback

• Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons or the number


3 Press ENTER to start downloading. buttons to change channels.
From this screen there are eight parameters you can set:
Downloading Pr 5
• Skip – If you want to skip the displayed channel
Cancel (because there is no station assigned to that
channel), change the Skip setting to On.
After downloading has finished, the channel mapping • CH System – Set the channel system used in your
screen appears showing which channels have been area or region.
assigned to which program numbers. • Channel – Change the channel number assigned to
the current preset.
• AFT (Auto Fine Tune) – When set to On, the station is
Tip
automatically tuned; set to Off to manually fine tune
• If the channel tuning information is updated in the (see below).
TV, the recorder will automatically download the new
• Level – Set the AFT level (see above).
information.
• Sound System – Set the sound system used for the
current channel.
Manual CH Setting • Name – Move the cursor right then input a name for
The channel skip function lets you skip channels where the current station, (up to five characters) then press
there is no station so that as you change channels using ENTER.
the CHANNEL +/– buttons or the number buttons, you
only change to channels that have a station. • Decoder – If the current channel is scrambled,
requiring a decoder connected to the AV2/AUTO
The manual tuning function allows you to manually tune START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) connector, set this
to stations, should you need to. to On. (See also AV2/L1 In on page 102.)

100
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 101 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

The Initial Setup menu 13

Channel Swapping 5 Press ENTER to swap the presets.


The preset swap feature lets you swap the channel 6 If you want to swap more presets, press 
assignments of different programs. This is so that you (cursor left), then repeats steps 3 to 5.
can group together station presets which naturally go
together. 7 Press HOME MENU to finish and exit.
1 Select ‘Channel Swapping’.
Set VIDEO Plus+ CH
Initial Setup • Default setting: n/a
Basic Auto Channel Setting Next Screen Guide channels are used by the VIDEO Plus+ system so
Tuner Manual CH Setting
Video In/Out Channel Swapping
that the channel number specified in the PlusCode
Audio In Set VIDEO Plus+ CH programming numbers can be guaranteed to
Audio Out
Language correspond to the correct station.
Recording
Playback
1 Select ‘Set VIDEO Plus+ CH’, then ‘Next Screen’.

2 Select ‘Next Screen’ to go to the swap presets Initial Setup


screen.
Basic Auto Channel Setting Next Screen
Tuner Manual CH Setting
Video In/Out Channel Swapping
Initial Setup Audio In Set VIDEO Plus+ CH
Audio Out
[1] 1/17 [2] 1/17 Language
Recording
Pr System CH Name Pr System CH Name
Playback
1 I CC40 1 I CC40
2 I 2 2 I 2
3 I 3 3 I 3
4
5
I
I
4
5
4
5
I
I
4
5
2 Assign channel numbers to the guide channels as
6 I 6 6 I 6 necessary.
Swap Preset 1 1 Look in your TV guide to see which channel numbers
should be assigned to which guide channels.
3 Use the / (cursor up/down) buttons to select
a preset station to swap. Initial Setup

• Use the PREV/NEXT buttons to display the previous/ Basic Set VIDEO
Auto Channel Plus+ CH
Setting 1/26
Tuner Manual CHGuide
Setting Preset Guide Preset
next page. Video In/Out Channel Swapping
1 Pr 4 6
Audio In Set VIDEO Plus+
2 CH 7
Audio Out
3 8
Language
Initial Setup 4 9
Recording
Playback 5 10
[1] 1/17 [2] 1/17
Pr System CH Name Pr System CH Name
1 I CC40 1 I CC40
2 I 2 2 I 2 • Use the / (cursor up/down) buttons to change
3 I 3 3 I 3
4 I 4 4 I 4
the guide channel for setting.
5
6
I
I
5
6
5
6
I
I
5
6 • Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to change
Swap Preset 5 1 the channel number.
• Use the PREV / NEXT button to display the previous/
4 Press  (cursor right), then select a preset next 10 guide channels.
station to swap with the first preset. 3 To return to the Initial Setup menu, press ENTER.

Initial Setup

[1] 1/17 [2] 1/17


Pr System CH Name Pr System CH Name
1 I CC40 1 I CC40
2 I 2 2 I 2
3 I 3 3 I 3
4 I 4 4 I 4
5 I 5 5 I 5
6 I 6 6 I 6
Swap Preset 5 3

101
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 102 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

13 The Initial Setup menu

AV1 Out
Video In / Out settings • Default setting: Video
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to your TV using the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART AV
Input Colour System connector.
• Default setting: Auto

Initial Setup Important


Basic Input Colour System Next Screen • If you make a setting here that is incompatible with
Tuner AV1 Out
Video In/Out AV2/L1 In your TV, the TV may not display any picture at all. If
Audio In NTSC on PAL TV
Audio Out
this happens either switch everything off and
Language reconnect to the TV using either the supplied video
Recording
Playback cable, or an S-video cable (see Using the S-video
output on page 15 for more on this), or reset the
On the default setting, the recorder automatically detects recorder (see Resetting the recorder on page 112 for
whether the video signal from the built-in tuner or from how to do this).
one of the external inputs is PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or
PAL–60. You may, however, occasionally need to set it Initial Setup

manually if the picture is not displayed properly. Basic Input Colour System Video
Tuner AV1 Out S-Video
Video In/Out AV2/L1 In RGB
1 Select ‘Input Colour System’, then ‘Next Screen’. Audio In NTSC on PAL TV
Audio Out
2 Use the CHANNEL +/– buttons or the INPUT Language
Recording
SELECT button to switch between the built-in tuner Playback
and the external inputs.
3 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to • Video – Compatible with all TVs, but lowest quality of
change the input colour system for the current input the three AV settings.
or built-in tuner. • S-Video – Almost the same quality as RGB, but can
give better results if you are using a long SCART
Pr 5 cable.
Auto • RGB – If your TV is compatible, this setting gives the
best picture quality.

• The available settings depend on the Input Line


System setting (see Input Line System on page 98). AV2/L1 In
The table below shows the different options available. • Default setting: Video
You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to another component using the AV2/AUTO
Input Line System Built-in tuner External input START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector.
625 System Auto Auto
Initial Setup
PAL PAL Basic Input Colour System Video
Tuner AV1 Out S-Video
SECAM SECAM Video In/Out AV2/L1 In RGB
Audio In NTSC on PAL TV Decoder
Audio Out
525 System n/a Auto Language
Recording
Playback
3.58 NTSC

PAL–60 The AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/DECODER)


connector input can be set to one of the following
settings:
• Video – Sets the input signal type to composite
video.
• S-Video – Sets the input signal type to S-video.
• RGB – Sets the input signal type to RGB video.

102
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 103 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

The Initial Setup menu 13

• Decoder – Use this setting if you are using a decoder


connected to the AV2/AUTO START REC (INPUT 1/ Audio In settings
DECODER) input. (For scrambled channels, make
sure that the manual channel Decoder setting is set
to On—see also Manual CH Setting on page 100). NICAM Select
Note that on this setting, it is not possible to use Auto • Default setting: NICAM
Start Recording.
Initial Setup

Basic NICAM Select NICAM


Note Tuner Tuner Level Regular Audio
Video In/Out External Audio
• When the Input Line System setting is set to 525 Audio In Bilingual Recording
System, RGB can’t be selected. Audio Out DV Input
Language Input Level (L1)
• When the Input Line System setting is set to 625 Recording
Playback
Input Level (L2)

System, RGB can be selected, but if the Input Line


System is then changed to 525 System, the AV2/L1
If you want to record the non-NICAM audio in a TV
In setting automatically changes to Video.
broadcast, select Regular Audio, otherwise set to
• See also Input Line System on page 98. NICAM. (When set to NICAM, you can still select
Regular Audio using the AUDIO button. See Changing
NTSC on PAL TV audio channels on page 29.)
• Default setting: On
Tuner Level
Initial Setup • Default setting: Normal
Basic Input Colour System On
Tuner AV1 Out Off
Video In/Out AV2/L1 In Initial Setup
Audio In NTSC on PAL TV
Audio Out Basic NICAM Select Normal
Language Tuner Tuner Level Compression
Recording Video In/Out External Audio
Playback Audio In Bilingual Recording
Audio Out DV Input
Language Input Level (L1)
Recording Input Level (L2)
When set to On, NTSC discs (from the U.S., for example) Playback
will play correctly on a PAL-only TV. Change to Off if your
TV is already NTSC-compatible. Set to Compression if the audio level from the built-in
Depending on this setting and the Input Line System tuner is excessively high causing distortion.
setting (see Input Line System on page 98), the signal
format output when the recorder is stopped varies as
External Audio
shown in the table below.
• Default setting: Stereo

Initial Setup
NTSC on PAL Output when
Input Line System Basic NICAM Select Stereo
TV stopped Tuner Tuner Level Bilingual
Video In/Out External Audio
625 System Off PAL Audio In Bilingual Recording
Audio Out DV Input
Language Input Level (L1)
On PAL Recording Input Level (L2)
Playback
525 System Off NTSC

On PAL–60 If the external source is standard stereo, leave set to


Stereo. If each channel carries a separate soundtrack,
change to Bilingual.
Note DVR-520H/720H only: When the external audio is from
the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV
• Many recent PAL TVs are capable of correctly
audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or
displaying NTSC pictures without the need for this
bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here.
setting. Check the manual that came with your TV if
you’re not sure whether yours has this feature.

103
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 104 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

13 The Initial Setup menu

Bilingual Recording You can adjust the gain of the audio from each external
• Default setting: A/L input individually, from –6dB to +6dB in steps of 3 dB to
optimize the recorded audio level.
Initial Setup

Basic NICAM Select A/L


Tuner Tuner Level B/R
Video In/Out External Audio
Audio In
Audio Out
Bilingual Recording
DV Input
Audio Out settings
Language Input Level (L1)
Recording Input Level (L2)
Playback
Digital Out
• Default setting: On
When recording a bilingual source from an external input
in Video mode or VR mode set to FINE/MN32, or to the
Initial Setup
HDD, you can choose to record either the A/L (left), or
Basic Digital Out On
the B/R (right) audio channel. Tuner Dolby Digital Out Off
Video In/Out DTS Out
Audio In 96kHz PCM Out
Audio Out MPEG Out
Note Language
Recording
• If you’re recording in VR mode (except when set to Playback

FINE/MN32), both channels will be recorded and you


can switch them as you like on playback. If at any time you need to switch off the digital audio
output, set this to Off, otherwise leave it On.
DV Input (DVR-520H/720H only)
• Default setting: Stereo1 Note
You need to set this if you have a camcorder using 32kHz/ • When set to Off, all the other Audio Out settings are
12-bit sound connected to the front panel DV IN/OUT jack. grayed out and can’t be set.

Initial Setup
Dolby Digital Out
Basic NICAM Select Stereo1
Tuner Tuner Level Stereo2 You only need to make this setting if you connected this
Video In/Out
Audio In
External Audio
Bilingual Recording
Mix (Stereo1: 75%)
Mix (Stereo1: 50%)
recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using
Audio Out DV Input Mix (Stereo1: 25%) the digital output.
Language Input Level (L1)
Recording Input Level (L2) • Default setting: Dolby Digital
Playback

Initial Setup
Some digital camcorders have two stereo tracks for
Basic Digital Out Dolby Digital
audio. One is recorded at the time of shooting; the other Tuner Dolby Digital Out Dolby Digital  PCM
is for overdubbing after shooting. Video In/Out DTS Out
Audio In 96kHz PCM Out
On the Stereo1 setting, the sound that was recorded Audio Out
Language
MPEG Out

while shooting is used. On the Stereo2 setting, the Recording


Playback
overdubbed sound is used. You can also choose a Mix
setting of 25%, 50% or 75% for the Stereo 1 with a
corresponding Stereo 2 setting of 75%, 50% or 25%. If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component)
is Dolby Digital compatible, set to Dolby Digital,
otherwise set to Dolby Digital  PCM. Check the
Input Level (L1 / L2) manual that came with the connected component if
• Default setting: 0dB you’re unsure whether it is Dolby Digital compatible.

Initial Setup

Basic NICAM Select +6dB


Tuner Tuner Level +3dB
Video In/Out External Audio 0dB
Audio In Bilingual Recording – 3dB
Audio Out DV Input – 6dB
Language Input Level (L1)
Recording Input Level (L2)
Playback

104
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 105 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

The Initial Setup menu 13

DTS Out MPEG Out


You only need to make this setting if you connected this You only need to make this setting if you connected this
recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using
the digital output. the digital output.
• Default setting: On • Default setting: MPEG  PCM

Initial Setup Initial Setup

Basic Digital Out On Basic Digital Out MPEG


Tuner Dolby Digital Out Off Tuner Dolby Digital Out MPEG  PCM
Video In/Out DTS Out Video In/Out DTS Out
Audio In 96kHz PCM Out Audio In 96kHz PCM Out
Audio Out MPEG Out Audio Out MPEG Out
Language Language
Recording Recording
Playback Playback

If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component) If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component)
has a built-in DTS decoder, set to On, otherwise set to is MPEG audio compatible, set to MPEG, otherwise set to
Off. Check the manual that came with the connected MPEG  PCM. Check the manual that came with the
component if you’re unsure whether it is DTS connected component if you’re unsure whether it is
compatible. MPEG compatible.

Important
• If you set to On with a non-DTS compatible amp/ Language settings
receiver, noise will be output when you play a DTS
disc.
• When set to On, there is no analog audio output OSD Language
when playing a DTS DVD-Video disc. • Default setting: English
• When playing a DTS audio CD (even when DTS Out
is Off), noise is output from the analog outputs. Do Initial Setup

not play this through your amplifier and speakers. Basic OSD Language English
Tuner Audio Language Français
• When playing a DTS audio CD, make sure that Video In/Out Subtitle Language Deutsch
Audio In Auto Language Italiano
Stereo is selected using the AUDIO button. See Audio Out DVD Menu Language Español
Language Subtitle Display
Switching audio channels on page 44. Recording
Playback

96kHz PCM Out


This sets the language of the on-screen menus and
You only need to make this setting if you connected this displays.
recorder to an AV amp/receiver (or other component) using
the digital output.
• Default setting: 96kHz  48kHz Audio Language
• Default setting: English
Initial Setup
Initial Setup
Basic Digital Out 96kHz  48kHz
Tuner Dolby Digital Out 96kHz Basic OSD Language English
Video In/Out DTS Out Tuner Audio Language French
Audio In 96kHz PCM Out Video In/Out Subtitle Language German
Audio Out MPEG Out Audio In Auto Language Italian
Language Audio Out DVD Menu Language Spanish
Recording Language Subtitle Display Other
Playback Recording
Playback

If your AV amp/receiver (or other connected component)


is compatible with high sampling rate audio (88.2 / 96 This setting is your preferred audio language for DVD
kHz), set to 96kHz, otherwise set to 96kHz  48kHz. discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a
Check the manual that came with the connected disc, the recorder automatically plays the disc in that
component if you’re unsure whether it is compatible with language (although this depends on the Auto Language
high sampling rate audio. setting—see Auto Language on page 106).

105
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 106 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

13 The Initial Setup menu

Choose Other if you want to specify a language other Set to Off to have the recorder play discs strictly
than those listed (see Selecting ‘Other’ languages on according to your Audio Language and Subtitle
page 107). Language settings.
For Auto Language to work, the Audio Language and
Subtitle Language settings must be the same—see
Tip
Audio Language on page 105 and Subtitle Language
• You can switch between the languages recorded on above.
a DVD disc any time during playback using the
AUDIO button. (This does not affect this setting.)
Note
• Even when set to On, Auto Language may not work
Subtitle Language with some discs. In this case, set the audio and
• Default setting: English subtitle languages using the AUDIO and SUBTITLE
buttons.
Initial Setup

Basic OSD Language English


Tuner Audio Language French
Video In/Out Subtitle Language German
Tip
Audio In Auto Language Italian
Audio Out DVD Menu Language Spanish • You can still switch audio and subtitle languages on
Language Subtitle Display Other
Recording
playback using the AUDIO and SUBTITLE buttons.
Playback

DVD Menu Language


This setting is your preferred subtitle language for DVD
• Default setting: w/Subtitle Language
discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a
disc, the recorder automatically plays the disc with those
subtitles (although this depends on the Auto Language Initial Setup

setting—see Auto Language below). Basic OSD Language w/Subtitle Language


Tuner Audio Language English
Choose Other if you want to specify a language other Video In/Out Subtitle Language French
Audio In Auto Language German
than those listed (see Selecting ‘Other’ languages on Audio Out DVD Menu Language Italian
Language Subtitle Display Spanish
page 107). Recording Other
Playback

Tip Some multilingual discs have disc menus in several


• You can change or switch off the subtitles on a DVD languages. This setting specifies in which language the
disc any time during playback using the SUBTITLE disc menus should appear. Leave on the default setting
button. (This does not affect this setting.) for menus to appear in the same language as your
Subtitle Language—see Subtitle Language above.
Choose Other if you want to specify a language other
Auto Language than those listed (see Selecting ‘Other’ languages on
• Default setting: On page 107).

Initial Setup

Basic OSD Language On


Tuner Audio Language Off
Video In/Out Subtitle Language
Audio In Auto Language
Audio Out DVD Menu Language
Language Subtitle Display
Recording
Playback

When set to On, the recorder selects the default audio


language on a DVD disc (French dialog for a French
movie, for example), and displays subtitles in your
preferred subtitle language only if that is set to
something different. In other words, movies in your native
language won’t have any subtitles, while foreign
language movies will be shown with subtitles.

106
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 107 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

The Initial Setup menu 13

Subtitle Display
• Default setting: On Recording settings
Initial Setup

Basic
Manual Recording
OSD Language On
Tuner Audio Language Off • Default setting: Off
Video In/Out Subtitle Language Assist Subtitle
Audio In Auto Language
Audio Out DVD Menu Language
Language Subtitle Display Initial Setup
Recording
Playback Basic Manual Recording On (go to setup)
Tuner Optimized Rec Off
Video In/Out Navi Mark
Audio In Auto Chapter (Video)
When set to On, the recorder displays subtitles Audio Out Frame Accurate
Language DVD-RW Auto Init.
according to the Subtitle Language and Auto Recording
Language settings. Set to Off to switch subtitles off Playback

altogether (although you may find that some discs


override this setting). Set to Assist Subtitle to have the On the default setting there are four different recording
recorder display the extra assistive subtitles recorded on time/picture quality settings, FINE, SP, LP and EP. If you
to some DVD discs. want to create a custom setting, switch on Manual
Recording and select one of the 32 manual settings.
Selecting ‘Other’ languages When recording, you can select your Manual Recording
setting using the REC MODE button.
1 Select ‘Other’ from the language list.
This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu 1 Select ‘On (go to setup)’ to display the manual
Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language. recording setting screen.

2 Select the language you want. Pr 5

HDD Remain 30h33m DVD Remain 2h00m


EP LP SP FINE
Initial Setup

Basic DVD Menu Language


OSD Language
MN 9 (4h00m/DVD) 2.60Mbps Preview
Tuner Audio Language
Language English
Video In/Out Subtitle Language
Audio In Auto Language
Number 0 5 1 4
Audio Out DVD Menu Language 2 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to
Language Subtitle Display
Recording change the manual recording level.
Playback
• You can also use the  and  buttons to cycle
between levels MN1, MN9, MN21 and MN32.
• Select by language name: Use the / (cursor left/
• To preview the recording quality, press  (cursor
right) buttons to change the language.
down) and select Preview. To return to the level
• Select by code number: Press  (cursor down) then adjust screen, press ENTER.
use the number buttons to enter the four-digit
language code. 3 Press ENTER to set the manual recording level
and return to the menu screen.
See Language code list on page 119 for a list of available
languages and corresponding codes.
Note
3 Press ENTER to confirm and exit the screen.
• The preset picture quality settings correspond to the
following manual settings: FINE: MN32, SP: MN21,
LP: MN9, EP: MN1.
• See Manual recording modes on page 118 for
detailed information on the manual recording levels.

107
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 108 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

13 The Initial Setup menu

Optimized Rec Auto Chapter (Video)


• Default setting: Off • Default setting: 10 minutes

Initial Setup Initial Setup

Basic Manual Recording On Basic Manual Recording No Separation


Tuner Optimized Rec Off Tuner Optimized Rec 10 minutes
Video In/Out Navi Mark Video In/Out Navi Mark 15 minutes
Audio In Auto Chapter (Video) Audio In Auto Chapter (Video)
Audio Out Frame Accurate Audio Out Frame Accurate
Language DVD-RW Auto Init. Language DVD-RW Auto Init.
Recording Recording
Playback Playback

On the default setting, if a timer program (standard, easy When recording in Video mode, a new chapter is started
or VIDEO Plus+ programming system) is set but there every 10 minutes on the default setting. You can change
isn’t enough space on the disc at the recording quality this interval to 15 minutes, or switch off automatic
set, the recording will start, but it will be cut off when the chapter marking altogether with the No Separation
disc is full. Set Optimized Rec to On to have the recorder setting.
automatically adjust the recording quality to fit the
available disc space.
Frame Accurate
• Default setting: Off
Note
• You may notice a reduction in picture quality if the Initial Setup

recorder has to fit a lot of extra material into the Basic Manual Recording On
Tuner Optimized Rec Off
remaining time available on the disc. Video In/Out Navi Mark
Audio In Auto Chapter (Video)
• If, even on recording level MN 1, there is insufficient Audio Out Frame Accurate
Language DVD-RW Auto Init.
space available on the disc, the recording is made on Recording
the HDD at the quality setting you originally Playback

specified.
• Optimized Recording only compensates for the first When Frame Accurate setting is Off, exact frame
(earliest starting) timer program if more than one has accuracy is traded for high-speed copying when
been set. recording a Copy List. Switch Frame Accurate On to
preserve the accuracy of the Copy List. However, copying
• Optimized recording works only with DVD
some edited Video mode titles will be done in real time.
recordings.
• Optimized recording can’t be used together with
VPS/PDC. Important
• When you change this setting the Copy List is erased.
Navi Mark Make sure it is set how you want it before you start
• Default setting: 0 seconds putting together a Copy List.
• The Frame Accurate setting has no effect on the
Initial Setup
actual video content stored on the HDD.
Basic Manual Recording 0 seconds
Tuner Optimized Rec 30 seconds
Video In/Out Navi Mark 3 minutes DVD-RW Auto Init.
Audio In Auto Chapter (Video)
Audio Out Frame Accurate • Default setting: VR Mode
Language DVD-RW Auto Init.
Recording When you load a new, blank DVD-RW disc the recorder
Playback
automatically initializes it for recording. You can set it to
initialize the disc for VR mode or Video mode recording.
In the Disc Navigator, each title is shown with a still
frame picture to remind you what it is. This setting lets Initial Setup
you decide the default still frame. The default setting of 0 Basic Manual Recording VR Mode
seconds takes the first frame of the title, but you can also Tuner Optimized Rec Video Mode
Video In/Out Navi Mark
set it to 30 seconds or 3 minutes into the title (if the title Audio In Auto Chapter (Video)
is shorter than the setting, then the first frame is used). Audio Out
Language
Frame Accurate
DVD-RW Auto Init.
Recording
Playback

108
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 109 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

The Initial Setup menu 13

Seamless Playback
Playback settings VR mode HDD

• Default setting: Off


TV Screen Size During playback of a VR mode Play List, you may notice
• Default setting: 4:3 (Letter Box) momentary interruption in the picture at edited points.
The Seamless Playback feature lets you trade-off
Initial Setup accuracy of the edit points for more seamless playback.
Basic TV Screen Size 4:3 (Letter Box) When switched On, you may notice that the edit points
Tuner Still Picture 4:3 (Pan & Scan)
Video In/Out Seamless Playback 16:9
are a few frames earlier or later than you set.
Audio In Parental Lock
Audio Out Angle Indicator
Language Initial Setup
Recording
Playback Basic TV Screen Size On
Tuner Still Picture Off
Video In/Out Seamless Playback
Audio In Parental Lock
If you have a widescreen TV, select the 16:9 setting— Audio Out Angle Indicator
widescreen DVD software is then shown using the full Language
Recording
screen area. When playing software recorded in Playback
conventional (4:3) format, the settings on your TV will
determine how the material is presented—see the
manual that came with your TV for details on what Parental Lock
options are available. • Default level: Off
If you have a conventional TV, choose either 4:3 (Letter • Default password: none
Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan). In Letter Box mode,
widescreen software is shown with black bars at the top • Default Country code: us (2119)
and bottom of the screen. Pan & Scan chops the sides off Some DVD-Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. If
widescreen material to make it fit the 4:3 screen (so even the recorder is set to a lower level than the disc, it will
though the picture looks larger on the screen, you’re require you to enter a password before the disc will play.
actually seeing less of the movie). See Screen sizes and This gives you some control about what your children
disc formats on page 113 for more information. watch on your DVD recorder.
Some discs also support the Country code feature. The
Still Picture recorder does not play certain scenes on these discs
depending on the Country code you set.
• Default setting: Auto
Before you can set the Parental Lock level or the Country
Initial Setup
code you must set a password. As the password owner
you can change the Parental Lock level or Country code
Basic TV Screen Size Field
Tuner Still Picture Frame whenever you like. You can also change the password.
Video In/Out Seamless Playback Auto
Audio In Parental Lock
Audio Out Angle Indicator
Language Note
Recording
Playback • Not all discs that you may consider inappropriate for
your children use the Parental Lock feature. These
The recorder uses one of two processes when displaying discs will always play without requiring the password
a still frame from a DVD disc. The default Auto setting first.
automatically chooses the best setting each time. • If you forget the password, you can reset the recorder
• Field – produces a stable, generally shake-free to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on
image. page 112), then set a new password.
• Frame – produces a sharper image, but more prone
to shake than field stills. Parental Lock : Set Password
The password you set will enable you to change the
Parental Lock level and Country code setting. It is also the
password that you will need to enter if you want to play a
disc with a parental lock level higher than the recorder.

109
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 110 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

13 The Initial Setup menu

1 Select ‘Set Password’. 5 Press ENTER.

Initial Setup
Parental Lock : Change Level
Basic TV Screen Size Set Password
Tuner
Video In/Out
Still Picture
Seamless Playback
Change Level
Country Code
1 Select ‘Change Level’.
Audio In Parental Lock
Audio Out Angle Indicator
Language Initial Setup
Recording
Playback Basic TV Screen Size Change Password
Tuner Still Picture Change Level
Video In/Out Seamless Playback Country Code
Audio In Parental Lock
2 Use the number buttons to input a four-digit Audio Out Angle Indicator
password. Language
Recording
Playback

Initial Setup

Basic TV ScreenSet Size


Password 2 Use number buttons to enter your password,
Tuner
Video In/Out
Still Picture
Seamless Playback
then press ENTER.
Audio In Parental Lock 1 2 3 4
Audio Out Angle Indicator
Language Initial Setup
Recording
Playback Basic TV ScreenParental
Size Lock : Change Level
Tuner Still Picture
Video In/Out Password
Seamless Playback 1 2 3 4
Audio In Parental Lock
3 Press ENTER to set the password. Audio Out Angle Indicator
Language Off
Recording
Playback
Parental Lock : Change Password
To change your password, confirm your existing
3 Use the / (cursor left/right) buttons to select
password then enter a new one.
a new parental lock level.
1 Select ‘Change Password’.
Initial Setup
Initial Setup Basic TV ScreenParental
Size Lock : Change Level
Tuner Still Picture
Basic TV Screen Size Change Password Video In/Out Password
Seamless Playback 1 2 3 4
Tuner Still Picture Change Level Audio In Parental Lock
Video In/Out Seamless Playback Country Code Audio Out Angle Indicator
Audio In Parental Lock Language Off
Audio Out Angle Indicator Recording
Language Playback
Recording
Playback

4 Press ENTER to set the new Parental Lock level.


2 Use the number buttons to enter your existing
password.
Parental Lock : Country Code
You may also want to refer to the Country code list on
Initial Setup
page 119.
Basic TV ScreenChange
Size Password
Still Picture
Tuner
Video In/Out Seamless Playback
1 Select ‘Country Code’.
Current Password 1 2 3 4
Audio In Parental Lock
Audio Out Angle Indicator
New Password
Language Initial Setup
Recording
Playback Basic TV Screen Size Change Password
Tuner Still Picture Change Level
Video In/Out Seamless Playback Country Code
Audio In Parental Lock
3 Press ENTER. Audio Out Angle Indicator
Language
4 Enter a new password. Recording
Playback

Initial Setup

Basic TV ScreenChange
Size Password
Tuner Still Picture
Video In/Out Seamless Playback
Current Password 1 2 3 4
Audio In Parental Lock
Audio Out Angle Indicator
New Password 5 6 7 8
Language
Recording
Playback

110
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 111 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

The Initial Setup menu 13

2 Use number buttons to enter your password, On the default setting, when playing a DVD-Video disc
then press ENTER. that features multi-angle scenes, an icon appears on-
screen during the parts of the disc where angle switching
Initial Setup is available. Change to Off to hide the on-screen
Basic TV ScreenParental
Size Lock: Country Code
indicator.
Tuner Still Picture
Video In/Out Password
Seamless Playback 1 2 3 4
Audio In Parental Lock
Audio Out Angle Indicator us
Code
Language
Recording Number 2 1 1 9
Playback

3 Select a Country code.


There are two ways you can do this.
• Select by code letter: Use / (cursor left/right) to
change the country code.

Initial Setup

Basic TV ScreenParental
Size Lock: Country Code
Tuner Still Picture
Video In/Out Password
Seamless Playback 1 2 3 4
Audio In Parental Lock
Audio Out Angle Indicator us
Code
Language
Recording Number 2 1 1 9
Playback

• Select by code number: Press  (cursor down) then


use the number buttons to enter the four-digit
country code (you can find the Country code list on
page 119.)

Initial Setup

Basic TV ScreenParental
Size Lock: Country Code
Tuner Still Picture
Video In/Out Password
Seamless Playback 1 2 3 4
Audio In Parental Lock
Audio Out Angle Indicator us
Code
Language
Recording Number 2 1 1 9
Playback

4 Press ENTER to set the new Country code.

Note
• Changing the country code does not take effect until
the next disc is loaded (or the current disc is
reloaded).

Angle Indicator
• Default setting: On

Initial Setup

Basic TV Screen Size On


Tuner Still Picture Off
Video In/Out Seamless Playback
Audio In Parental Lock
Audio Out Angle Indicator
Language
Recording
Playback

111
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 112 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

14 Additional information

Chapter 14
Additional information
Maker Code
Resetting the recorder Alba 66
If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory
settings. Bush 76

1 Make sure that the recorder is on. Finlux 84

2 Press and hold  STOP and press  STANDBY/ Fisher 61, 65


ON.
Fujitsu 77
The recorder turns off with all settings reset.
Funai 67

Goldstar 79

Setting up the remote to control your Grandiente 87


TV Grundig 51, 82
You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be
Hitachi 56, 60, 83, 86
able to use this feature you first have to program the
remote with a maker code from the table below. ITT 70
1 Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then Mitsubishi 59
enter the maker code for your TV.
The LED indicator on the remote controls lights. Nokia 53, 81
See the table below for the list of maker codes. If there is Panasonic 58, 72
more than one code given for your make, input the first
one in the list. Philips 57, 85

• If the maker’s name of your TV doesn’t appear in the Pioneer 50, 80


table below, you will not be able to use this remote to
RCA 68
control your TV.
Salora 71
2 Press  TV to check that the remote works with
your TV. Samsung 73, 75
If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch on/
off. If it doesn’t and there is another code given for your Sanyo 74
maker, repeat step 1 with a new code. Sei 78

Sharp 52
Using the TV remote control buttons
The table below shows how to use this remote control Sony 54
with your TV.
Tandy 69
Button What it does
Telefunken 64
 TV Press to switch the TV on/off (standby)
Thomson 62
INPUT SELECT Press to change the TV’s video input
Toshiba 55
TV VOLUME Use to adjust the TV volume
Victor 63
TV CHANNEL Use to change TV channels

112
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 113 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Additional information 14

Screen sizes and disc formats


When viewing on a standard TV or monitor

Screen format of disc Setting Appearance


16:9 4:3 (Letter Box) The program is shown in
widescreen with black bars at
the top and bottom of the
screen.

4:3 (Pan & Scan) The sides of the program are


cropped so that the picture
fills the whole screen.

4:3 16:9 The program appears


squashed. Set to either 4:3
(Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan &
Scan).

4:3 (Letter Box) The program is presented


4:3 (Pan & Scan) correctly on either setting.

When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor

Screen format of disc Setting Appearance


16:9 16:9 The program is presented in
widescreen.

4:3 16:9 Your TV will determine how the


picture is presented—check
the manual that came with the
TV for details.

113
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 114 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

14 Additional information

Troubleshooting
Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this
component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the
other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the
points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.

General
Problem Remedy
The disc is automatically ejected • Check that the disc is not a DVD-RAM, DVD+R/RW or other incompatible format
after closing the disc tray disc (page 9).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 121).
• Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder (page 123).

No picture • Check that everything is connected properly (page 12).


• Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to the correct
input.

Can’t play a disc • Check that the disc is not a DVD-RAM, DVD+R/RW or other incompatible format
disc (page 9).
• Take out the disc and clean it (page 121).
• Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).
• There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for an hour or so
for the condensation to evaporate.
• During HDD recording, you can’t play discs that are recorded with a Line System
different to the current recorder setting.

All settings are reset • If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on,
all the settings will be lost.
• Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the
power cord.

Screen goes blank and controls are • Press  STOP then restart playback.
inoperative

Remote control does not work • If you connected this recorder to another Pioneer product using the CONTROL
IN jack, point the remote control at the other component to use (page 12).
• Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 99). (When
the batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1.)
• Use the remote within its operating range (page 8).
• Replace the batteries (page 8).

No sound or sound is distorted • Make sure that the amp/receiver or TV is set to the correct input and the volume
turned up.
• There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow
motion play. Press  PLAY to resume regular playback.
• DTS discs can only be played if this recorder is connected to a DTS decoder or
DTS compatible amp/receiver. If you have connected a suitable decoder, also make
sure that the Initial Setup > Audio Out > DTS Output setting is On.
• Some 96kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. In this case,
switch the input of your amp/receiver to analog.
• Check the audio cable connections (page 12).
• If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.

The picture from the external input • If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot
is distorted connect via this recorder. Connect the component directly to your TV.

114
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 115 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Additional information 14

Problem Remedy
The picture is distorted • Change the Input Line System setting (page 98). (You can also change it by
pressing the + button and DVD on the front panel simultaneously with the
recorder stopped.)

Screen is stretched vertically or hori- • Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 109) is correct for the kind of TV
zontally you have (see also page 113).
• If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings.
• This recorder’s input switches into wide mode automatically according to the
input signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1
(widescreen signalling), set the connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio
(standard) video.

Can’t play a disc recorded using this • If the disc was recorded in Video mode, make sure that it’s finalized (page 59).
recorder on another player •Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in Video
mode and finalized.
• If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be specifically RW
compatible in order to play it (page 9).
• Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-CPRM
compatible players (page 46).

During playback the picture is dark • When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not display
or distorted correctly. Connect the recorder directly to your TV.

Can’t control your TV using this • If there is more than one code listed for your make of TV, try each one in turn
remote control (page 112).
• It is possible that none of the codes listed will work with your particular model of
TV, even if the maker appears in the remote control code list.

Can’t record or does not record suc- • Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD.
cessfully • For a Video mode disc, check that the disc isn’t already finalized.
• The HDD may contain up to 250 titles; one DVD disc 99 (Original) titles and 999
chapters. Check that these limits have not been reached.
• Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected.
• For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn’t locked (page 92).
• Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) as the
disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV
system. When recording to the HDD, it is also necessary to set the Input Line
System setting to match what you want to record (page 98).
• The power may have failed during recording.

Timer program doesn’t record suc- • When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder’s built-in TV
cessfully tuner, not the TV’s built-in tuner.
• When recording to a Video mode disc, programs that are copy-once protected
cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy-once material
(page 46).
• Two timer programs may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will
record completely.
• The power may have failed during recording.

After briefly unplugging or after a • A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from
power failure the front panel dis- being reset when there is no power to the recorder. This battery should last
play shows ‘--:--’ approximately five years from factory shipping.
Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again. To have the
battery replaced, contact your dealer or a Pioneer Service Center.

Front panel display shows ‘LOCK’ • The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 55).
when a button is pressed

115
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 116 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

14 Additional information

Problem Remedy
Can’t use One Touch Copy (HDD to • Make sure that there is a recordable DVD loaded with some free space for
DVD) recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a
Video mode disc, the disc isn’t finalized.
• If the title currently playing contains material that is copy-once protected, One
Touch Copy will not work.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to DVD.

Can’t use One Touch Copy (DVD to • Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than
HDD) 250 titles on the HDD.
• One Touch Copy doesn’t work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD.

The picture freezes and the front • Press the front panel  STANDBY/ON button to switch the power off, then
panel and remote control buttons switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and hold
stop working  STANDBY/ON for 10 seconds until the power switches off.

Note
• If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug
from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.

high-speed copy). Alternatively, you could copy the


Frequently asked questions material in SP (or Optimized) so as to fit it all on to one
disc (note that there will be some loss in picture
In this section you can find answers to frequently asked
quality if you do this).
questions on how to use your DVD recorder and what it
can do. See also Copying and back-up on page 61.
• How do I make a high-quality copy?
We recommend that you use the high-speed copy • Can I record a bilingual broadcast to the HDD, keeping
mode. Although the copy is faster than real time, both audio channels and switch them on playback?
there is no loss of picture or sound quality compared No. Only the audio channel set in the Bilingual
to the original. Recording setting in the Initial Settings menu will be
If there is not enough space on the disc to make a recorded. If you need to record both channels of
copy at the same picture quality as the original, we audio, please record using a VR mode DVD-RW disc.
recommend that you change the recording mode to See also Bilingual Recording on page 104.
‘Optimized’. This will fit the recording on to the
available space on the disc.
• Can I record continuously on the HDD for more than
See also Copying and back-up on page 61. six hours?
Yes, timer recordings made to the HDD can by set for
• Can I make a DVD copy of, say, a movie that has had up to 24 hours. However, because the maximum
the commercials edited out? length of a title is six hours, the recording will be
Yes. There are two ways to do this. You can either edit spread over two or more titles. Note that there will be
the video on the HDD then copy the edited version to a short break in the recording between titles.
DVD, or you can assemble a Copy List that cuts out See also Setting a timer recording on page 49.
the commercials, then record that to DVD.
See also Copying and back-up on page 61. • Can I copy a finalized Video mode disc (DVD-R or DVD-
RW) to the HDD?
• I have a two-hour recording on the HDD made in FINE Yes. Start playing the Video mode disc and use the
mode. Can I copy this to DVD in high-speed mode? One Touch Copy button to copy the currently playing
A standard DVD disc can hold only an hour of FINE title to the HDD. Repeat for as many titles on the disc
mode material, so you wouldn’t be able to make a as you want to copy.
high-speed copy of this on to one disc. You could See also One Touch Copy* (DVD to HDD) on page 62.
divide up the recording on the HDD into two titles of
an hour each and copy these to two DVDs (using
116
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 117 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Additional information 14

• Can I use high-speed copy to copy from DVD to HDD? • Audio output from the DV IN/OUT jack is 16-bit only.
You can only use high-speed copy from DVD to HDD • Audio input to the DV IN/OUT jack should be 32 or
when copying Original titles from a VR mode DVD- 48kHz (not 44.1kHz).
RW. • Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the
See also Copying from DVD to HDD* on page 71. source component pauses playback or plays an
unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the
source component, or the DV cable becomes
• Can I copy a copy-once protected program from a
disconnected.
subscription satellite or cable channel to a DVD from
the HDD?
Yes, you can use high-speed copy to copy to a VR DV-related messages
mode DVD-RW disc. You can also divide the You may see the following messages appear on your TV
recording on the HDD into a number of smaller titles screen when using the DV IN/OUT jack.
if the whole recording won’t fit on to one disc. • No DV camcorder connected. – The camcorder is
See also Copying from HDD to DVD* on page 63. not connected properly, or the camcorder is switched
off.
• The DV camcorder is recording. – The camcorder is
• Can I play a DVD I recorded on this recorder on another
recording, so you cannot start recording from the
DVD player?
camcorder to this recorder.
Yes, you can generally play DVD-R discs and Video
• You cannot connect more than one DV
mode DVD-RW discs recorded on this recorder on
camcorder at the same time. – The DV jack on this
any standard DVD player. You may find, however, that
recorder supports connection to just one camcorder.
some players will not play some recordable media.
• No tape in the DV camcorder. – There is no
For VR mode DVD-RW discs, look for the ‘RW
cassette loaded into the connected equipment.
Compatible’ mark to see if it will play the disc.
• The DV camcorder is in record-pause mode. – The
camcorder is in record-pause mode.
• DV camcorder playback canceled.
About DV (DVR-520H/720H only) Recording has been paused. – Recording was
paused because the camcorder is not in playback
Using DV, also known as i.LINK, you can connect a DV- mode.
equipped camcorder to this recorder using a single DV
cable for input and output of audio, video, data and • Cannot operate the DV camcorder. – This recorder
control signals. cannot control the camcorder. Try switching off the
camcorder then switching it back on.
The i.LINK interface is also known as IEEE 1394-1995.
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks. • Could not operate the DV camcorder. – This
recorder was not able to control the camcorder.
• This recorder is only compatible with DV-format
(DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite tuners and • Recording has stopped because the recorded
Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible. material on the tape finished. – When the recorded
part of the DV tape comes to an end, this recorder
• You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at automatically stops recording.
a time to this recorder.
• Recording has stopped because DV camcorder
• You cannot control this recorder from external playback stopped. – Recording stopped because
equipment connected via the DV IN/OUT jack. DV camcorder playback was stopped or the
• It may not always be possible to control the camcorder was disconnected.
connected camcorder via the DV IN/OUT jack. • The DV camcorder is not set for playback. Please
• This recorder only outputs HDD/DVD playback video select playback mode on the DV camcorder. – The
from the DV IN/OUT jack; signals from the built-in TV camcorder is in camera mode.
tuner, CD, Video CD and other inputs are not output.
• Copy-protected or copy-once video is not output from
the DV IN/OUT jack.
• Digital camcorders can usually record audio as
stereo 16-bit/48kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit/
32kHz. This recorder can only record one stereo
audio track. Set the DV Input setting as required (see
DV Input (DVR-520H/720H only) on page 104).
117
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 118 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

14 Additional information

Manual recording modes


The table below shows the approximate recording times
for all of the 32 manual recording modes, as well as the
standard recording mode equivalents. Levels separated
by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in
picture quality. The divisions for HDD recording are the
same as those for Video mode.
Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in
Dolby Digital 2ch format, except for MN32 which is in
Linear PCM format.

Video mode /
VR mode
HDD
Level Rec. time Level Rec. time
MN 1 360 mins. EP MN 1 360 mins.
MN 2 345 mins. MN 2 345 mins.
MN 3 330 mins. MN 3 330 mins.
MN 4 315 mins. MN 4 315 mins.
MN 5 300 mins. MN 5 300 mins.
MN 6 285 mins. MN 6 285 mins.
MN 7 270 mins. MN 7 270 mins.
MN 8 255 mins. MN 8 255 mins.
MN 9 240 mins. LP MN 9 240 mins.
MN 10 230 mins. MN 10 230 mins.
MN 11 220 mins. MN 11 220 mins.
MN 12 210 mins. MN 12 210 mins.
MN 13 200 mins. MN 13 200 mins.
MN 14 190 mins. MN 14 190 mins.
MN 15 180 mins. MN 15 180 mins.
MN 16 170 mins. MN 16 170 mins.
MN 17 160 mins. MN 17 160 mins.
MN 18 150 mins. MN 18 150 mins.
MN 19 140 mins. MN 19 140 mins.
MN 20 130 mins. MN 20 130 mins.
MN 21 120 mins. SP MN 21 120 mins.
MN 22 110 mins. MN 22 110 mins.
MN 23 105 mins. MN 23 105 mins.
MN 24 100 mins. MN 24 100 mins.
MN 25 95 mins. MN 25 95 mins.
MN 26 90 mins. MN 26 90 mins.
MN 27 85 mins. MN 27 85 mins.
MN 28 80 mins. MN 28 80 mins.
MN 29 75 mins. MN 29 75 mins.
MN 30 70 mins. MN 30 70 mins.
MN 31 65 mins. MN 31 65 mins.
MN 32 61 mins. FINE MN 32 61 mins.

118
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 119 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Additional information 14

Language code list


Language (Language code letter), Language code
Japanese (ja), 1001 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Sinhalese (si), 1909
English (en), 0514 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Latin (la), 1201 Slovak (sk), 1911
French (fr), 0618 Estonian (et), 0520 Lingala (ln), 1214 Slovenian (sl), 1912
German (de), 0405 Basque (eu), 0521 Laothian (lo), 1215 Samoan (sm), 1913
Italian (it), 0920 Persian (fa), 0601 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Shona (sn), 1914
Spanish (es), 0519 Finnish (fi), 0609 Latvian (lv), 1222 Somali (so), 1915
Chinese (zh), 2608 Fiji (fj), 0610 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Albanian (sq), 1917
Dutch (nl), 1412 Faroese (fo), 0615 Maori (mi), 1309 Serbian (sr), 1918
Portuguese (pt), 1620 Frisian (fy), 0625 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Siswati (ss), 1919
Swedish (sv), 1922 Irish (ga), 0701 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Sesotho (st), 1920
Russian (ru), 1821 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Sundanese (su), 1921
Korean (ko), 1115 Galician (gl), 0712 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Swahili (sw), 1923
Greek (el), 0512 Guarani (gn), 0714 Marathi (mr), 1318 Tamil (ta), 2001
Afar (aa), 0101 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Malay (ms), 1319 Telugu (te), 2005
Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Hausa (ha), 0801 Maltese (mt), 1320 Tajik (tg), 2007
Afrikaans (af), 0106 Hindi (hi), 0809 Burmese (my), 1325 Thai (th), 2008
Amharic (am), 0113 Croatian (hr), 0818 Nauru (na), 1401 Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Arabic (ar), 0118 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Nepali (ne), 1405 Turkmen (tk), 2011
Assamese (as), 0119 Armenian (hy), 0825 Norwegian (no), 1415 Tagalog (tl), 2012
Aymara (ay), 0125 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Occitan (oc), 1503 Setswana (tn), 2014
Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Oromo (om), 1513 Tonga (to), 2015
Bashkir (ba), 0201 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Oriya (or), 1518 Turkish (tr), 2018
Byelorussian (be), 0205 Indonesian (in), 0914 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Tsonga (ts), 2019
Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Icelandic (is), 0919 Polish (pl), 1612 Tatar (tt), 2020
Bihari (bh), 0208 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Twi (tw), 2023
Bislama (bi), 0209 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Quechua (qu), 1721 Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Bengali (bn), 0214 Javanese (jw), 1023 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Urdu (ur), 2118
Tibetan (bo), 0215 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Uzbek (uz), 2126
Breton (br), 0218 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Romanian (ro), 1815 Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Catalan (ca), 0301 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Volapük (vo), 2215
Corsican (co), 0315 Cambodian (km), 1113 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Wolof (wo), 2315
Czech (cs), 0319 Kannada (kn), 1114 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Xhosa (xh), 2408
Welsh (cy), 0325 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Sangho (sg), 1907 Yoruba (yo), 2515
Danish (da), 0401 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Zulu (zu), 2621

Country code list


Country, Country code, Country code letter
Argentina, 0118, ar Finland, 0609, fi Malaysia, 1325, my Singapore, 1907, sg
Australia, 0121, au France, 0618, fr Mexico, 1324, mx Spain, 0519, es
Austria, 0120, at Germany, 0405, de Netherlands, 1412, nl Sweden, 1905, se
Belgium, 0205, be Hong Kong, 0811, hk New Zealand, 1426, nz Switzerland, 0308, ch
Brazil, 0218, br India, 0914, in Norway, 1415, no Taiwan, 2023, tw
Canada, 0301, ca Indonesia, 0904, id Pakistan, 1611, pk Thailand, 2008, th
Chile, 0312, cl Italy, 0920, it Philippines, 1608, ph United Kingdom, 0702, gb
China, 0314, cn Japan, 1016, jp Portugal, 1620, pt USA, 2119, us
Denmark, 0411, dk Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr Russian Federation, 1821, ru

119
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 120 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

14 Additional information

On-screen displays and recorder displays


The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation
of their meaning.

Message Explanation/Action
• Initializing disc. Please wait a moment. When you load a blank DVD-RW disc, the recorder automatically
initializes it.

• Incompatible region number. The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the
recorder and so will not play.

• Cannot record any more titles. The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum
• No more space for file management data. number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/
• Cannot add any more chapter marks. chapters or combine chapters.

• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the final- The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD recorder. Undo the
ization. finalization in order to recording/editing.

• Cannot play this disc. The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the disc, clean it and
• This disc cannot be recorded. retry. If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even
• Cannot read the CPRM information. with a new disc, please consult a Pioneer Service Center.
• Could not record the information to the disc.
• Cannot edit.
• Could not initialize disc.
• Could not complete finalization successfully.
• Could not undo finalization successfully.
• Could not successfully unlock the disc.

• Incompatible or unreadable disc. The disc loaded is a DVD-RAM, DVD+R/RW or some other
incompatible disc type. This display may also appear if the disc is
dirty or damaged.

• Cannot record to a disc that is not CPRM com- The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD-RW
patible. disc with CPRM for recording.
• Cannot record this content using Video mode
recording.

• This content is copy protected. The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded.

• Incorrect CPRM information. The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder
may be damaged—please consult a Pioneer Service Center.

• The audio will conform to the [Bilingual When recording from an external input in Video mode, or in VR
Recording] setting. mode set to MN 32, audio is recorded in Linear PCM format. You
can only record the left or right channel; not both.

• Repairing disc. During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when
the power is restored.

• Could not repair the disc. The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The
contents of the recording will be lost.

• Overheating has stopped operation. The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the
Press DISPLAY to clear this message. operating limit. If this message reappears, please contact a
Pioneer authorized service center.

120
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 121 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Additional information 14

Message Explanation/Action
• There is no DV input or the input signal is unre- No signal was detected at the DV input/output jack. This may
cordable. appear if a blank section of DV tape is playing in the connected
• Cannot preview because there is no DV input camcorder. (Applicable to DVR-520H/720H only.)
or the input signal is unrecordable.

• This channel’s TV system is different from the The TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the current channel is different
recorder’s setting. from the TV system settings of this recorder.

• Recording failed due to a TV system mismatch. The timer recording failed because the TV system of the channel
Press DISPLAY to clear message. set for recording was different from the setting of the recorder.

• Playback has stopped because the TV system is During recording or timer recording standby, the TV System (PAL,
different than the recording. NTSC, etc.) of the playback video changed, causing playback to
stop automatically.

Handling discs
When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave
fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold
the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge. For more detailed care information see the instructions
that come with discs.
Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and
recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the Do not load more than one disc into the recorder.
label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the
recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc
becoming unusable.
Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust, Damaged discs
etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can
from the center to the outside edge as shown in the see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise
diagram below. damaged, don't risk using it; you could end up damaging
the recorder.
This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully
circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not
recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all
liability arising in connection with the use of shaped
If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a discs.
commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a
disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or
other cleaning agents, including products designed for
cleaning vinyl records.

Storing discs
Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl
records, you should still take care to handle and store
discs correctly. When you're not using a disc, return it to
its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in
excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including
under direct sunlight).
Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a
pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing
instrument. These could all damage the disc.

121
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 122 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

14 Additional information

Cleaning the pickup lens Moving the recorder


The DVD recorder’s lens should not become dirty in If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if
normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction there’s one loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press 
due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer- STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby, checking
authorized service center. Although lens cleaners for CD that the POWER OFF indication in the display goes off.
players are commercially available, we do not re- Wait at least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power
commend using them since some may damage the lens. cord. Never lift or move the unit during playback or
recording—discs rotate at a high speed and may be
damaged.

Condensation
Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is
brought into a warm room from outside, or if the Glossary
temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the
condensation won’t damage the recorder, it may
temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you Analog audio
should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for An electrical signal that directly represents sound.
about an hour before switching on and using. Compare this to digital audio which can be an electrical
signal, but is an indirect representation of sound. See
also Digital audio.

Aspect ratio
Hints on installation The width of a TV screen relative to its height.
We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other words, the screen is
please bear in mind the following points when choosing almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the screen
a suitable location for it: is almost twice as wide as it is high).

Do... Chapter
 Use in a well-ventilated room. Just as a book is split up into several chapters, a title on
 Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, the HDD/a DVD disc is usually divided into chapters. See
shelf or stereo rack. also Title.

Don’t... Digital audio


 Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or An indirect representation of sound by numbers. During
humidity, including near radiators and other heat- recording, the sound is measured at discrete intervals
generating appliances. (44,100 times a second for CD audio) by an analog-to-
 Place on a window sill or other place where the digital converter, generating a stream of numbers. On
recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight. playback, a digital-to-analog converter generates an
analog signal based on these numbers. See also
 Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room
Sampling frequency and Analog audio.
where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke.
 Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other Dolby Digital
component in your stereo system that becomes hot in
use. 1
 Use near a television or monitor as you may With multichannel audio, this high quality surround
experience interference—especially if the television uses system is used in many movie theaters around the world.
an indoor antenna.
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories.
 Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder “Dolby” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
may be exposed to smoke or steam. Laboratories.
 Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth—this
may prevent proper cooling of the unit.
 Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large
enough to support all four of the unit’s feet.

122
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 123 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Additional information 14

DRM (Digital Rights Management) MPEG audio


DRM (Digital Rights Management) copy protection is a
technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by
restricting playback, etc. of material on devices other the An audio format used on Video CDs and some DVD
PC (or other WMA recording equipment) used to record discs. This unit can convert MPEG audio to PCM format
it. For detailed information, please see the instruction for wider compatibility with digital recorders and AV
manuals or help files that came with your PC (or other amp/receivers. See also PCM.
WMA recording equipment) and/or software.
MPEG video
DTS The video format used for Video CDs and DVDs. Video CD
uses the older MPEG-1 standard, while DVD uses the
newer and much better quality MPEG-2 standard.
DTS stands for Digital Theater System. DTS is a surround
system different from Dolby Digital that has become a Optical digital output
popular surround sound format for movies. A jack that outputs digital audio in the form of light
pulses. Connect components with optical digital jacks
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trademarks of
using a special optical cord, available from specialist
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
audio dealers.

Dynamic range PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)


The difference between the quietest and loudest sounds
The most common system of encoding digital audio,
possible in an audio signal (without distorting or getting
found on CDs and DAT. Excellent quality, but requires a
lost in noise). Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks are
lot of data compared to formats such as Dolby Digital
capable of a wide dynamic range, delivering dramatic
and MPEG audio. For compatibility with digital audio
cinema-like effects.
recorders (CD, MD and DAT) and AV amp/receivers with
digital inputs, this unit can convert Dolby Digital and
EXIF (Exchangeable Image File) MPEG audio to PCM. See also Digital audio.
A file format developed by Fuji Photo Film for digital still
cameras. Digital cameras from various manufacturers PBC (PlayBack Control) (Video CD/Super VCD only)
use this compressed file format which carries date, time
A system of navigating a Video CD/Super VCD through
and thumbnail information, as well as the picture data.
on-screen menus recorded onto the disc. Especially good
for discs that you would normally not watch from
File extension beginning to end all at once—karaoke discs, for example.
A tag added to the end of a filename to indicate the type
of file. For example, “.mp3” indicates an MP3 file. Regions (DVD only)

ISO 9660 format 2 ALL


(example region code marks)
International standard for the volume and file structure of Regions associate discs and players with particular
CD-ROM discs. areas of the world. This unit will only play discs that have
compatible region codes. You can find the region code of
JPEG your unit by looking on the rear panel. Some discs are
A file format used for still images, such as photographs compatible with more than one region (or all regions).
and illustrations. JPEG files are identified by the file
extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”. Most digital cameras use this Sampling frequency
format. The rate at which sound is measured to be turned into
digital audio data. The higher the rate, the better the
MP3 sound quality, but the more digital information is
MP3 (MPEG1 audio layer 3) is a compressed audio file generated. Standard CD audio has a sampling frequency
format. Files are recognized by their file extension “.mp3” of 44.1kHz, which means 44,100 samples
or “.MP3”. (measurements) per second. See also Digital audio.

123
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 124 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

14 Additional information

Title
A collection of chapters on a the HDD/DVD disc. See also
Chapter.

Track
Audio CDs and Video CDs use tracks to divide up the
content of a disc. The DVD equivalent is called a chapter.
See also Chapter.

WMA
WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and refers to an
audio compression technology developed by Microsoft
Corporation. WMA data can be encoded by using
Windows Media Player version 9 or Windows Media
Player for Windows XP. Files are recognized by their file
extension “.wma” or “.WMA”.
Microsoft, Windows Media, and the Windows logo are
trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

124
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 125 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Additional information 14

Tuner
Specifications Receivable channels

PAL B/G PAL I


Frequency Channel Frequency Channel
General VHF (low) 47 - 89 MHz E2 - E4 44 - 89 MHz A-C
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDD, DVD-Video, DVD-R/RW, X-Z X-Z
Video-CD, Super VCD, CD, VHF (high) 104 - 300 MHz E5 - E12 104 - 300 MHz D-J
S1 - S20 11, 13
CD-R/RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA) M1 - M10 S1 - S20
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz U1 - U10
Power consumption Hyper 302 - 470 MHz S21 - S41 302 - 470 MHz S21 - S41
DVR-420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 W UHF 470 - 862 MHz E21 - E69 470 - 862 MHz E21 - E69

DVR-520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 W
DVR-720 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 W SECAM L SECAM D/K
Frequency Channel Frequency Channel
Power consumption in standby mode 0.68 W VHF (low) 49 - 65 MHz 2-4 49 - 94 MHz R1 - R5
(Front panel display: off /Power Save Mode2)
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 kg VHF (high) 104 - 300 MHz 5 - 10 104 - 300 MHz R6 - R12
B-Q S1 - S20
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 (W) x 59 (H) x 339 (D) mm
Operating temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .+5°C to +35°C
Operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5% to 85% Hyper 300 - 470 MHz S21 - S41 302 - 470 MHz S21 - S41
UHF 470 - 862 MHz 21 - 69 470 - 862 MHz E21 - E69
(no condensation)
TV system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAL/SECAM/
STEREO
NTSC (external input only) B/G - A2
Recording I - NICAM
L - NICAM
Recording format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DVD Video Recording B/G - NICAM
DVD-VIDEO D/K - NICAM
Recordable discs
DVD-RW (DVD Re-recordable disc)
DVD-R (DVD Recordable disc) Timer
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 month/32 programs
Video recording format Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quartz lock (24-hour digital display)
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5MHz Power off memory . . . .Approx. 5 years (after manufacture)
Compression format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPEG
Audio recording format
Input/Output
Sampling frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48kHz
VHF/UHF antenna input/output terminal . . . . VHF/UHF set
Compression format. . . . . . . . .Dolby Digital or Linear PCM
75 Ω (IEC connector)
(uncompressed)
Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1 (rear), 2 (front)
Recording time
Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
HDD—DVR-720H Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 2 (Input 1),
Fine (FINE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 hours RCA jack (Input 2)
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 hours Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1 Output
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 136 hours Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 204 hours Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1)
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34–204 hours RCA jack (Output)
HDD—DVR-420H/520H S-Video input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1 (rear), 2 (front)
Fine (FINE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17 hours Y (luminance) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 34 hours C (colour) - Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 Ω)
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 68 hours Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV connector 2 (Input 1),
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 102 hours 4 pin mini DIN (Input 2)
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 17–102 hours S-Video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1 / Output
DVD-R/DVD-RW Y (luminance) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)
Fine (FINE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1 hour C (colour) - Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 mVp-p (75 Ω)
Standard Play (SP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 2 hours Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1),
Long Play (LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 4 hours 4 pin mini DIN (Output)
Extended Play (EP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 6 hours RGB input
Manual Mode (MN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approx. 1–6 hours Input level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1)
RGB output
Output level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 Vp-p (75Ω)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1)

125
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 126 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

14 Additional information

Audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input 1 (rear), 2 (front) L/R


Input level
During audio input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2V rms
(Input impedance: more than 22 kΩ)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 2 (Input 1),
RCA jacks (Input 2)
Audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .AV1 Output
During audio output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2V rms
(Output impedance: less than 1.5 kΩ)
Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV connector 1 (AV1),
RCA jacks (Output)
Control input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini jack
DV input/output (DVR-520H/720H only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pin
(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)

AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment)


AV connector input/output . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-pin connector
This connector provides the video and audio signals for
connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor.

PIN no. AV1(RGB)-TV / AV2(INPUT 1)


1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 2/R out / Audio 2/R out
2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 2/R in
11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G out / G in
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio 1/L out / Audio 1/L out
6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Audio 1/L in
15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R or C out / R or C in
4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND
7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B out / B in
19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video out or Y out / Video out
20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . – / Video in or Y in
8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Status
21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GND

Supplied accessories
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Audio / Video cable (red/white/yellow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
RF antenna cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Operating Instructions

Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject


to change without notice, due to improvement.

126
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 127 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Index 15

Index

English
A O
Adjusting the picture quality 94–96 One Touch Copy 6, 21, 23, 61, 62–63, 116
Audio DRC 96 One Touch Recording 7, 48
Audio language 23, 43, 105 On-screen display (OSD) 33, 105
Audio settings 103–105 Optimized recording 7, 52, 65, 107, 116
Auto language 105, 106 Original content 7, 11, 23, 34, 76, 78, 79–83, 87
Auto Scan - see Automatic channel setup OSD - see On-screen display (OSD)
Automatic channel setup 25, 99
AV amplifier (connecting to) 19, 27
P
AV connector 12, 14–18, 98, 100, 102, 126 PAL 45, 46, 98, 99, 102, 103
PBC (PlayBack Control for Video CD) 32, 36, 123
B PhotoViewer 90–91
Bilingual audio 22, 29, 44, 46, 48, 103, 104, 116 Picture quality - see Adjusting the picture quality
and Recording quality
C Play List 7, 11, 22, 23, 34, 76, 79, 84–88
Camcorder - see DV camcorder Play Mode menu 23, 40–42
Changing TV channels 29, 112 Program play 41, 41–42
Chase play - see Simultaneous recording and playback
Copy List 63–74, 108, 116 R
CPRM 46, 120 Recording 6–7, 28, 35, 45–60
Recording quality 46, 47, 94
D Recovery recording 7, 49
Disc and file formats 9, 113 Remote control 8, 23, 99
Disc compatibility - see Disc and file formats Repeat play 41, 42
Disc Navigator 36–37, 76–88, 108 Rotating (a JPEG picture) 91
Dolby Digital 6, 27, 43, 44, 46, 96, 104, 122
Downloading channel presets from the TV 13, 25, 100 S
DV camcorder 7, 20, 57, 58, 117 Scanning 24, 38
SCART - see AV connector
E SECAM 45, 46, 98, 99, 102
Easy Timer Recording 6, 50 Setting up 25–27, 112
Editing recordings 76–88 Simultaneous recording and playback 6, 35, 55
F Slow motion playback 39
Subtitle langauge 23, 43, 106
Finalizing discs 34, 59, 93
I T
Timer recording 6, 13, 17, 22, 24, 35, 49–55, 56
Initializing discs 45, 60, 93, 108
Input colour system 98, 102 TV aspect ratio 108, 113
Input line system 98, 102, 103 TV audio channel 29, 48, 103, 104
TV system - see Input line system and Input colour system
J
JPEG picture files 7, 10, 35, 90–91, 123
V
Video mode 7, 9, 10, 22, 35, 45, 59, 60, 62, 93, 108,
M 116, 118
Manual channel setup 100 VIDEO Plus+ 6, 23, 52–53, 101
Manual recording mode (MN) 22, 47, 107, 118 Video settings 94–96, 102–103
MP3 audio 7, 9, 32, 123 VPS/PDC 6, 22, 49, 51, 52, 55
MPEG audio 12, 105, 123 VR mode 10, 22, 45, 48, 59, 60, 62, 79, 84, 93, 108,
109, 117, 118
N
NICAM audio 29, 103 W
NTSC 22, 45, 46, 95, 96, 98, 102, 103 WMA audio 7, 9, 32, 124

Z
Zooming (a JPEG picture) 91

127
En

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com


DVR-04_HDD_UK.book 128 ページ 2004年4月11日 日曜日 午後6時11分

Published by Pioneer Corporation.


Copyright © 2004 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.

PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
K002_A_En

Printed in the UK <VRB1340-A>

You might also like